Автосервис Москва, Авиамоторная
Автосервис ЮВАО, ВАО — метро Авиамоторная:
Автосервис Серп и Молот | Автосервис Красноказарменная | Автосервис Лефортово
Ближайшие станции метро — Авиамоторная, Площадь Ильича, Шоссе Энтузиастов, Чкаловская, Бауманская, Семеновская. Ближайшие для подъезда улицы — третье транспортное кольцо (ТТК), проезд завода Серп и Молот, Лефортовский вал, Красноказарменная улица.
Автосервис Москва, Октябрьское поле
Автосервис СЗАО, САО — метро Октябрьское поле, станция Зорге МЦК (район Щукино, Хорошёво—Мнёвники)
Ближайшие станции метро — Октябрьское поле, Полежаевская. Станция Московского Центрального Кольца — Зорге. Ближайшие для подъезда улицы — Маршала Бирюзова, Берзарина, Народного ополчения, Зорге, Куусинена, Расплетина.
Автосервис Москва, Измайлово
Автосервис ВАО — метро Соколиная гора (район Измайлово)
Ближайшие станции метро — Соколиная гора, Партизанская, Измайлово, Шоссе Энтузиастов, Черкизовская. Ближайшие для подъезда улицы — Вернисажная, Шоссе Энтузиастов, проспект Будённого, Северо-Восточная хорда, Щербаковская улица, Большая Черкизовская улица.
Автосервис Москва, Щелковская
Автосервис ВАО — метро Щелковская (район Гольяново)
Ближайшие станции метро — Щелковская, Черкизовская, Бульвар Рокоссовского, Первомайская, Партизанская, Измайловская. Ближайшие для подъезда улицы — Щелковское шоссе, Амурская, Сиреневый бульвар, Монтажная улица, Байкальская улица, Открытое шоссе.
AUTO-TEXCENTER.RU
Франшиза автосервиса, Вакансии автосервиса
Ремонт (сервис) корейских автомобилей. Специализированный техцентр (автосервис) в Москве. Copyright © 2000-2023. Все права сохранены. Обращаем Ваше внимание на то, что данный сайт носит исключительно информационный характер и ни при каких условиях не является публичной офертой, определяемой положениями Статьи 437 (2) Гражданского кодекса Российской Федерации.
Компания «АвтоМиг» является НЕОФИЦИАЛЬНЫМ техническим центром по обслуживанию и ремонту автомобилей марок KIA и HYUNDAI. Никакого отношения ни к официальным представителям (дилерам), ни к самим производителям транспортных средств автосервис не имеет! Все упоминания торговых знаков (марок автомобилей) на данном сайте носят исключительно ИДЕНТИФИЦИРУЮЩИЙ характер (используются не в качестве средства индивидуализации), указывают, какие именно автомобили обслуживает техцентр (в соответствии со ст. 1474, 1487 Гражданского Кодекса РФ).
Комментарии
4
Войдите или зарегистрируйтесь, чтобы писать комментарии, задавать вопросы и участвовать в обсуждении.
Войти
Зарегистрироваться
DIONIS60
Я езжу на Mazda Mazda 5 (3G)
Блин, просто ОГРОМНОЕ СПАСИБО 🤝
2 месяца
Vovan-L300
Автор
Я езжу на KIA Rio X-Line
у вас ссылка работает?
добавил ещё одну, там то же самое
2 месяца
mbk1964
Я езжу на KIA Rio X
👍
1 год
Valerievich75
Я езжу на KIA Rio X-Line
Спасибо 👍
2 года
инструкцияKia Rio (2019)
Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all trims of this vehicle and includes images,
descriptions, and explanations of optional as well as standard equip-
ment. As a result, some material in this manual may not be applicable
to your specific Kia vehicle. Some images are shown for illustration
only and may show features that differ from those on your vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
SC CAN (ENG) FOREWORD.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 1
Woland
Kia Rio for Russia
-
в клубе с 20.04.2012
-
сообщений: 6 030
-
KIA RIO 4 X-line Prestige 1.6 АКПП
-
2 222
-
#1
Штатное руководство по эксплуатации (в электронном виде) скачать можно по ссылке
Зарегистрируйтесь чтобы видеть ссылки
-
#2
Есть руководство по эксплуатации на рио 4 рестайлинг, был бы очень благодарен.
AndrewOST
Завсегдатай
-
в клубе с 11.01.2018
-
сообщений: 597
-
KIA RIO 4 Luxe 1.6 МКПП
-
124
-
#3
Есть руководство по эксплуатации на рио 4 рестайлинг, был бы очень благодарен.
при покупке машины не дали?
-
#4
Дали но там нет ни одной электросхемы, нужно разобраться с подключением Usb после замены магнитолы
-
#5
Или в руководствах новых авто нет такой информации?
NikolaTesla
Участник тусовки
-
в клубе с 17.10.2018
-
сообщений: 53
-
KIA RIO 4 Luxe 1.6 МКПП
-
9
-
#6
Или в руководствах новых авто нет такой информации?
Да и в старых не было. Электросхемы для дилера, обычным смертным не дают, да и не думаю что там сильно отличается от дореста
shadowthegod
Участник тусовки
-
в клубе с 05.12.2020
-
сообщений: 170
-
KIA RIO 4 Classic Audio 1.4 МКПП
-
22
-
#7
@NikolaTesla, я думаю вообще не отличается, кроме бамперов и передних фар)
-
#8
@NikolaTesla, я думаю вообще не отличается, кроме бамперов и передних фар)
В общем ты прав)
shadowthegod
Участник тусовки
-
в клубе с 05.12.2020
-
сообщений: 170
-
KIA RIO 4 Classic Audio 1.4 МКПП
-
22
-
#9
@Андрей кио4 рестайл, основную линию конвейера менять кардинально из-за рестайлинга не выгодно. Цель рестайлинга изменить внешность для других вкусов, кому не понравилась внешность предыдущей. Затем продавать туже самую машину, но для другого круга. По этому изменения минимальны, только форменные.
-
#10
,Согласен, у меня был выбор между рапидом и рио, мне больше рио зашла
Summary of Content for Kia Rio 2019 Hatchback Owner’s Manual PDF
Kia, THE COMPANY Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owners Manual was accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all trims of this vehicle and includes images,
descriptions, and explanations of optional as well as standard equip-
ment. As a result, some material in this manual may not be applicable
to your specific Kia vehicle. Some images are shown for illustration
only and may show features that differ from those on your vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
SC USA FOREWORD.QXP 7/18/2018 5:52 PM Page 1
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech- nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace- ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac- tion.
Because subsequent owners require this important information as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte- nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup- plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual that provides important information on all warranties regarding your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
2018 Kia Motors America, Inc.
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in whole or in part without the written consent of Kia Motors America, Inc.
Printed in MEXICO
Foreword
SC USA FOREWORD.QXP 7/18/2018 5:52 PM Page 2
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Safety features of your vehicle
Features of your vehicle
Audio system
Driving your vehicle
What to do in an emergency
Maintenance
9Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
table of contents
SC USA FOREWORD.QXP 7/18/2018 5:52 PM Page 3
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders. . 1-6
1
SC USA 1.QXP 7/18/2018 5:51 PM Page 1
Introduction
21
We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owners Manual can assist you in many ways. We strong- ly recommend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimize the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAU- TION sections in the manual. Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to enjoy your vehicle. By reading your manual, you will learn about fea- tures, important safety information, and driving tips under various road conditions.
The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all located in the back of this manual. Sections: This manual has nine sec- tions plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the information you want.
You will find various types of safety instructions in this manual. These instructions were prepared to enhance your personal safety. Carefully read and follow ALL proce- dures and recommendations provid- ed in these instructions.
NOTICE A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored.
SC USA 1.QXP 7/18/2018 5:51 PM Page 2
1 3
Introduction
Your new vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having a pump octane number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not use methanol blend- ed fuels.)
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini- mize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling. Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified. (Consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.) Tighten the cap until it clicks one
time, otherwise the Check Engine light will illuminate.
Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alco- hol), and gasoline or gasohol con- taining methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol may be used in your vehicle. Do not use gasohol containing more than 15% ethanol, and do not use gasoline or gasohol containing any methanol. Ethanol provides less energy than gasoline and it attracts water, and it is thus likely to reduce your fuel efficiency and could lower your MPG results. Methanol may cause drivability prob- lems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system. Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur. Vehicle damage or drivability prob- lems may not be covered by the manufacturers warranty if they result from the use of: 1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol. 2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol. 3. Gasohol containing more than 15
percent ethanol
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
WARNING — Refueling Do not «top off» after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off. Attempts to force more fuel into the tank can cause fuel overflow onto you and the ground causing a risk of fire.
Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to pre- vent fuel spillage, especially in the event of an accident.
SC USA 1.QXP 7/18/2018 5:51 PM Page 3
Introduction
41
«E85» fuel is an alternative fuel com- prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15 percent gasoline, and is manufac- tured exclusively for use in Flexible Fuel Vehicles. E85 is not compati- ble with your vehicle. Use of E85 may result in poor engine perform- ance and damage to your vehicle’s engine and fuel system. Kia recom- mends that customers do not use fuel with an ethanol content exceed- ing 15 percent.
NOTICE Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not cover damage to the fuel sys- tem or any performance problems caused by the use of E85 fuel.
NOTICE Never use any fuel containing methanol. Discontinue use of any methanol containing product which may inhibit proper drivability.
Other fuels Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si), MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene (Fe), and Other metalic additives, may cause vehicle and engine dam- age or cause misfiring, poor acceler- ation, engine stalling, catalyst melt- ing, clogging, abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction, etc. Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may illuminate.
NOTICE Damage to the fuel system or per- formance problem caused by the use of these fuels may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains harmful man- ganese-based fuel additives Such as MMT(Me thy l cyc lopen tad ieny l Manganese Tricarbonyl). Kia does not recommend the use of gasoline con- taining MMT. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and affect your emission control system. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol Fuels containing methanol (wood alco- hol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system, engine control sys- tem and emission control system.
SC USA 1.QXP 7/18/2018 5:51 PM Page 4
1 5
Introduction
Fuel Additives Kia recommends that you use good quality gasolines treated with deter- gent additives such as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, which help pre- vent deposit formation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance of the Emission Control System. For more information on TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, please go to the website (www.toptiergas.com) For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, addi- tives that you can buy separately may be added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive should be added to the fuel tank at every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every engine oil change is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with infor- mation on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
Operation in foreign countries If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to: Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance. Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
No special break-in period is need- ed. By following a few simple precau- tions for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you may add to the perform- ance, economy and life of your vehi- cle. Do not race the engine. While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
Avoid hard stops, except in emer- gencies, to allow the brakes to seat properly.
Don’t tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of opera- tion.
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
SC USA 1.QXP 7/18/2018 5:51 PM Page 5
Introduction
61
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys- tems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: * How various systems in your
vehicle were operating; * Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were buckled/ fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was travel- ing.
These data can help provide a bet- ter understanding of the circum- stances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving con- ditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash loca- tion) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
SC USA 1.QXP 7/18/2018 5:51 PM Page 6
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Interior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2
SC USA 2.qxp 7/18/2018 5:50 PM Page 1
Your vehicle at a glance
22
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Hood………………………………………………4-28
2. Head lamp (Features of your vehicle) …4-78 Head lamp (Maintenance)…………………8-72
3. DRL lamp (Features of your vehicle) ….4-78 DRL lamp (Maintenance) ………………….8-72
4. Wheel and tire…………………………..8-40, 9-5
5. Outside rearview mirror…………………….4-43
6. Sunroof…………………………………………..4-34
7. Front windshield wiper blades (Features of your vehicle)………………….4-83 Front windshield wiper blades (Maintenance) …………………………………8-34
8. Windows …………………………………………4-22
9. Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system……………………………………………6-30
OSC017005N
Front view
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
SC USA 2.qxp 7/18/2018 5:50 PM Page 2
2 3
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Door locks ………………………………………4-12
2. Fuel filler lid …………………………………….4-31
3. Rear combination lamp (Maintenance) …………………………………8-74
4. High mounted stop lamp (Maintenance) …………………………………8-74
5. Trunk………………………………………………4-17
6. Antenna ……………………………………………5-2
7. Rear view monitor ……………………………4-76
OSC017006N
Rear view (4 DOOR)
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
SC USA 2.qxp 7/18/2018 5:50 PM Page 3
Your vehicle at a glance
42
1. Door locks ………………………………………4-12
2. Fuel filler lid …………………………………….4-31
3. Rear combination lamp (Maintenance) …………………………………8-73
4. High mounted stop lamp (Maintenance) …………………………………8-73
5. Tailgate …………………………………………..4-19
6. Antenna ……………………………………………5-2
7. Rear view monitor ……………………………4-76
8. Rear window wiper blade (Features of your vehicle)………………….4-87 Rear window wiper blade (Maintenance)…8-35
OSC017002N
Rear view (5 DOOR)
The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
SC USA 2.qxp 7/18/2018 5:50 PM Page 4
2 5
Your vehicle at a glance
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Inside door handle ……………………….4-13
2. Inner fuse panel …………………………..8-57
3. Power window switches ………………..4-23
4. Power window lock button …………….4-26
5. Outside rearview mirror control switch …………………………………………4-44
6. Outside rearview mirror folding switch …………………………………………4-45
7. Hood release lever……………………….4-28
8. Fuel filler lid release lever ……………..4-31
9. Trunk open lever ………………………….4-17
10. Steering wheel …………………………..4-40
11. Steering wheel tilt control ……………4-41
12. Instrument panel illumination control switch ……………………………………….4-47
13. ESC OFF button ………………………..6-21
14. Brake pedal……………………………….6-15
15. Accelerator pedal
OSC017003N
4 Door 5 Door
SC USA 2.qxp 7/18/2018 5:50 PM Page 5
Your vehicle at a glance
62
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
OSC018004N
1. Instrument cluster………………………..4-46
2. Horn ………………………………………….4-41
3. Drivers front air bag…………………….3-47
4. Light control/Turn signals ……………..4-78
5. Wiper/Washer……………………………..4-83
6. Ignition switch……………………………….6-6
7. Hazard warning flasher switch …………….7-2
8. Audio …………………………………………..5-8
9. Central door lock switch ……………….4-14
10. Climate control system …….4-94, 4-105
11. AUX, USB port ……………………………5-3
12. Automatic Transmission………………..6-9
13. Parking brake lever ……………………6-17
14. Passengers front air bag ……………3-47
15. Power outlet ……………………………4-124
16. Glove box ……………………………….4-119
17. Steering wheel audio control………….5-11
18. Seat warmer……………………………4-123
19. Heated steering wheel switch ……..4-42
20. Sport mode system……………………6-46
21. USB charger……………………………4-125
22. Center console storage 4-119
23. Cruise control button………………….6-41
SC USA 2.qxp 7/18/2018 5:51 PM Page 6
2 7
Your vehicle at a glance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OSC077013N
Gamma 1.6L GDI Engine (Gasoline)
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir ……………….8-24
2. Engine oil filler cap ………………………8-21
3. Brake / clutch fluid reservoir ………….8-26
4. Air cleaner…………………………………..8-29
5. Fuse box …………………………………….8-59
6. Negative battery terminal………………8-37
7. Positive battery terminal ……………….8-37
8. Engine oil dipstick ………………………..8-21
9. Radiator cap ……………………………….8-25
10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir….8-27
SC USA 2.qxp 7/18/2018 5:51 PM Page 7
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Drivers seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front passengers seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Headrest (for front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Seat belt restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Child Restraint System (CRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Air bag — advanced supplemental restraint system . . . . 3-32 How does the air bag system operate . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Occupant detection system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Driver’s and passenger’s front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag . 3-54
SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Adding equipment to or modifying your
air bag-equipped vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:45 PM Page 1
Safety features of your vehicle
23
Drivers seat (1) Forward and backward (2) Seatback angle (3) Seat cushion height* (4) Headrest
Front passengers seat (5) Forward and backward (6) Seatback angle (7) Headrest
Rear seat (8) Headrest (9) Seatback folding*
* : if equipped
SEAT
OSC037001N The actual seats in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:45 PM Page 2
3 3
Safety features of your vehicle
WARNING — Uprighting seat
Do not press the release lever on a manual seatback without holding and controlling the seatback. The seatback will spring upright possibly impact- ing you or other passengers.
WARNING — Loose objects Do not place anything in the dri- ver’s foot well or under the front seats. Loose objects in the dri- ver’s foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals.
WARNING — Driver responsibility for
passengers
The driver must advise the pas- senger to keep the seatback in an upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion. If a seat is reclined during an accident, the restraint system’s ability to restrain will be greatly reduced.
1KMN3661
WARNING — Seat cushion Occupants should never sit on aftermarket seat cushions or sit- ting cushions. The passenger’s hips may slide under the lap por- tion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop.
WARNING — Drivers seat Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov- ing. This could result in loss of control of your vehicle.
Do not allow anything to inter- fere with the normal position of the seatback and seatback adjustment.
Sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining comfortable control of your vehicle. A dis- tance of at least 10″ from your chest to the steering wheel is recommended. Failure to do so could result in air bag infla- tion injuries to the driver.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:45 PM Page 3
Safety features of your vehicle
43
Feature of Seat Leather Leather is made from the outer
skin of an animal, which goes through a special process to be available for use. Since it is a nat- ural substance, each part differs in thickness or density. Wrinkles may appear as a natural result of stretching and shrinking depending on the temperature and humidity.
The seat is made of stretchable fabric to improve comfort.
The parts contacting the body are curved and the side supporting area is high which provides driving comfort and stability.
Wrinkles may appear naturally from usage. It is not a fault of the product.
NOTICE Wrinkles or abrasions which appear naturally from usage are not cov- ered by warranty.
WARNING — Small Objects Use extreme caution when pick- ing small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the center console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seats mechanism.
CAUTION Belts with metallic acces-
sories, zippers or keys inside your back pants pocket may damage the seat fabric.
Make sure not to wet the seat. It may change the nature of natural leather.
Jeans or clothes which con- tain bleach may contaminate the surface of the seat cover- ing fabric and cause damage or discoloration.
WARNING — Seat adjustment
Do not adjust the seat while wearing seat belts. Moving the seat forward will cause strong pressure on the abdomen.
Do not place your hand near the seat bottom or seat track while adjusting the seat. Your hand could get caught in the seat mechanism.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:45 PM Page 4
3 5
Safety features of your vehicle
Front seat adjustment Forward and backward
To move the seat forward or backward: 1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever up and hold it. 2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely by trying to move forward and back- ward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.
Seatback angle
To recline the seatback: 1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback recline lever. 2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its orig- inal position for the seatback to lock.)
WARNING — Unexpected seat movement
After adjusting a manual seat, always check that it is locked by shifting your weight to the front and back. Sudden or unexpect- ed movement of the driver’s seat could cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
OYB036003
OYB036004
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:45 PM Page 5
Safety features of your vehicle
63
Seat Cushion height (if equipped, for drivers seat)
To change the height of the seat cushion push the lever upwards or downwards. To lower the seat cushion, push the
lever down several times. To raise the seat cushion, push the
lever up several times.
Headrest (for front seat)
The driver’s and front passenger’s seats are equipped with a headrest for the occupant’s safety and comfort. The headrest not only provides com- fort for the driver and front passen- ger, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant’s head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people’s head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended.
OYB036005
OSC037014N
WARNING — Headrest removal/adjustment
Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed. Headrests can provide critical neck and head support in a crash.
Do not adjust the headrest height while the vehicle is in motion. Driver may lose con- trol of the vehicle.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:45 PM Page 6
3 7
Safety features of your vehicle
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).
NOTICE If you recline the seatback towards the front with the headrest and seat cushion raised, the headrest may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest: 1. Recline the seatback (2) with the
recline lever(1). 2. Raise headrest as far as it can go. 3. Press the headrest release button
(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
OYB036006
OYFH034205
OYB036008
WARNING — Headrest Removal
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat with the headrest removed. Headrests can provide critical neck and head support in a crash.
CAUTION Excessive pulling or pushing may damage the headrest.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:46 PM Page 7
Safety features of your vehicle
83
To reinstall the headrest : 1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
holes while pressing the release button (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the recline lever (3).
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro- priate height.
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passengers seatback.
Rear seat adjustment Headrest (for rear seat)
The rear seat is equipped with head- rests in left and right side seating positions for the occupant’s safety and comfort. The headrest not only provides com- fort for passengers, but also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision.
WARNING — Seatback pocket
Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pocket. An occupant could contact such objects in a crash. Heavy objects in the front passenger seatback could also interfere with the air bag sensing system.
OYB036010
WARNING — Headrest Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to the head or neck, always make sure the head rest is locked into posi- tion and adjusted properly after reinstalling.
OYB036009
OSC037015N
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:46 PM Page 8
3 9
Safety features of your vehicle
For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant’s head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people’s head is similar with the height as the top of their eyes. Also adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this rea- son, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended. Adjusting the height up and down
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the headrest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3).
Removal and installation
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as it can go then press the release button (1) while pulling the headrest upward (2). To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it to the appropriate height and ensure that it locks in position.
OSC037022N OSC037023N
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:46 PM Page 9
Safety features of your vehicle
103
Folding the rear seat The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.
To fold down the rear seatback (if equipped):
1. When folding the seat back, insert the rear seat belt buckle in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion then make sure both seatbelts do not interfere with stowed luggage and cargo. Then, insert the seat belt into the two holes located on both sides.
2. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.
3. Lower the rear headrests to lowest position.
4. Pull the lock release lever and fold the rear seatback forward and down firmly.
WARNING — Folded Seatback
Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seat- back while the vehicle is mov- ing. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sud- den stop.
WARNING — Objects Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.
OSC037016N OSC037017N
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:46 PM Page 10
3 11
Safety features of your vehicle
To unfold the rear seat
1. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback rearward. Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place. When you return the seatback to its upright posi- tion, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.
2. Return the rear seat belt to the proper position.
3. When the seatback is completely installed, check the seatback fold- ing lever again.
When returning the rear seatbacks to the upright position, remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position.
CAUTION Be careful when loading cargo through the rear passenger seats to prevent damage to the vehicle interior.
WARNING Unless the drivers position is properly set according to the drivers physical figure, do not fold the rear seat. It may increase body injuries in a sud- den stop or collision.
WARNING — Uprighting seat
When you return the seatback to its upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. If the seatback is returned with- out holding it, the back of the seat could spring forward resulting in injury caused by being struck by the seatback.
WARNING When you return the rear seat- back to its upright position after being folded down: Be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Do not allow the seat belt webbing or buckle to get caught or pinched in the rear seat. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. Otherwise, in an acci- dent or sudden stop, the seat could fold down and allow cargo enter the passenger com- partment, which could result in serious injury or death.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:46 PM Page 11
Safety features of your vehicle
123
WARNING — Objects Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks.This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.
WARNING — Cargo Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from being thrown about the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants. Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit the front seat occupants in a collision.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:46 PM Page 12
3 13
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt restraint system Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be avoided. Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer. Care should be taken to avoid con- tamination of the webbing with pol- ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic- ularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be replaced if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.
For maximum restraint system pro- tection, the seat belts must always be used whenever the vehicle is moving. A properly positioned shoulder belt should be positioned midway over your shoulder across your collarbone.
Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. See child restraint system section for further discussion.
No modifications or additions should be made by the user which would either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.
When you fasten the seat belt, be careful not to latch the seat belt in buckles of other seats. It’s very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt properly.
Do not unfasten the seat belt and do not fasten and unfasten the seat belt repeatedly while driving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.
When fastening the seat belt, make sure that the seat belt does not pass over objects that are hard or can break easily.
SEAT BELTS
WARNING — Shoulder belt Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back. An improperly positioned shoulder belt cannot protect the occupant in a crash.
WARNING — Damaged seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt assembly if any part of the web- bing or hardware is damaged as you can no longer be sure that a damaged seat belt will provide protection in a crash.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:46 PM Page 13
Safety features of your vehicle
143
Seat belt warning
As a reminder to the driver, the dri- vers seat belt warning lights will illu- minate and warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the ignition switch ON regardless of belt fastening.
If the drivers seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch is turned ON or if it is disconnected after the igni- tion switch is turned ON, the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the belt is fastened. If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 6 mph (9 km/h), the illuminated warning light will illuminate. If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 12 mph (20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 sec- onds and the corresponding warning light will blink. If you unfasten the seat belt while driving under 12 mph (20 km/h) the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the seat belt is fastened.
OSC037018N
WARNING — Twisted seat belt
Make sure your seat belt is not twisted when worn. A twisted seat belt may not properly pro- tect you in an accident and could even cut into your body.
WARNING — Seat belt buckle
Do not allow foreign material (gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to obstruct the seat belt buckle. This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:46 PM Page 14
3 15
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt — Driver’s 3-point system with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible «click» when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sud- den stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly. If you are unable to pull out the seat belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the shoul- der belt anchor to one of the 3 posi- tions for maximum comfort and safety. The height of the adjusting seat belt should not be too close to your neck. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door and not your neck. To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.
OMG035038
B180A01NF-1
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:46 PM Page 15
Safety features of your vehicle
163
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2). Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position. Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face. Improperly positioned seat belts can cause serious injuries in an accident.
Seat belts — Front passenger and rear seat 3-point system with combination locking retractor To fasten your seat belt
Combination retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat posi- tions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems. Although a combination retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, it is strongly recom- mended that children always be seated in the rear seat. NEVER place an infant restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle. This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency lock- ing retractor seat belt and an auto- matic locking retractor seat belt. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible «click» when the tab locks into the buckle. When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver’s seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
B200A01NF WARNING — Seat belt
replacement Replace your seat belts after being in an accident. Failure to replace seat belts after an acci- dent could leave you with dam- aged seat belts that will not pro- vide protection in the event of another collision.
WARNING — Shoulder belt positioning
Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.
WARNING You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly across your hips, not on your waist. If the lap belt is locat- ed too high on your waist, it may increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustration. Never wear the seat belt under the arm near the door.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 16
3 17
Safety features of your vehicle
It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the instal- lation of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic Locking Retractor Type). Refer to Using a child restraint sys- tem in this section. To convert from the automatic lock- ing feature to the emergency locking operation mode, allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully retract.
The seat belt should be locked into the buckle on each seat cushion to be properly fastened.
A : Rear right seat belt fastening buckle
B : Rear center seat belt fastening buckle
C : Rear left seat belt fastening buckle
OSC037028
OSC037025
5 Door
4 Door
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 17
Safety features of your vehicle
183
When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the CENTER mark must be used.
To release the seat belt
The seat belt is released by pressing the release button (1) of the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
B210A01NF-1
CAUTION Do not forcefully lock the left or right seat belt latch into the cen- ter seat belt buckle. This may cause damage to the center buckle and prevent the buckle from properly latching in the future.
WARNING Be sure you are using the correct latch for the center seat belt buckle. Forcing the left or right seat belt latch into the center buckle can create the appear- ance of a secure seat belt when in fact the passenger is not prop- erly fastened in the seat belt.
OUB037020N
OSC037026
4 Door
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 18
3 19
Safety features of your vehicle
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver’s and front passenger’s pre-tensioner seat belts.
1. Retractor pre-tensioner The retractor pre-tensioner is a sup- plemental system of the seat belts. The purpose of the retractor pre-ten- sioner is to tighten the shoulder belt against the occupant’s upper body in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated, when a collision is severe enough, together with the air bags. When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor may lock into position. In certain frontal collisions (or side collisions), the pre-tensioner may activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant’s body. If the system senses excessive ten- sion on the driver or passenger’s seat belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the load limiter inside the retractor pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.
2. Emergency Fastening Device (EFD)
The Emergency Fastening Device (EFD) is a supplemental system of the seat belts. The purpose of the EFD is to tighten the lap belt against the occupant’s pelvis in certain colli- sions.
OXMA033101
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 19
Safety features of your vehicle
203
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following com- ponents.Their locations are shown in the illustration: 1. SRS air bag warning light 2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly 3. SRS control module 4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt: 1. The seat belt must be worn cor-
rectly and adjusted to the proper position. Please read and follow all of the important information and precautions about your vehicle’s occupant safety features — includ- ing seat belts and air bags — that are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts properly.
NOTICE When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating condi- tions and are not hazardous.
WARNING — Skin irritation Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated. The fine dust from the pre-tensioner activation may cause skin irrita- tion and should not be breathed for prolonged periods.
ODMESA2024
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 20
3 21
Safety features of your vehicle
Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag warning light ( ) on the instru- ment panel will illuminate for approxi- mately 6 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned to the ON position, and then it should turn off.If the pre-tensioner seat belt does not work properly, this warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag has not malfunctioned. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON, or if it remains illuminated after illuminating for approximately 6 sec- onds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, please have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS air bag system as soon as possible.
NOTICE Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt system in any manner. Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized Kia dealer.
Pre-tensioners are designed to oper- ate only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. If the pre-tensioner must be replaced, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
Seat belt precautions Infant or small child All 50 states have child restraint laws. You should be aware of the specific requirements in your state. Child and/or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. For more information about the use of these restraints, refer to Child restraint system in this section.
NOTICE Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Before buying any child restraint sys- tem, make sure that it has a label cer- tifying that it meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to Child restraint system in this section.
WARNING — Hot pre- tensioner
Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-ten- sioner seat belt mechanism fires during a collision the pre- tensioner becomes hot and can burn you.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 21
Safety features of your vehicle
223
Larger children Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occu- py the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened snug on the hips and as low as possible. Periodically check belt fit. A child’s squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are given the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 13) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoul- der belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. Children age 13 and under should be restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a child age 13 and under in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle. If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the childs neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system.
Restraint of pregnant women Pregnant women should wear lap/shoulder belt assemblies when- ever possible according to specific recommendations by their doctors. The lap portion of the belt should be worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS POSSIBLE on the hips, not across the abdomen.
WARNING — Pregnant women
Pregnant women must never place the lap portion of the seat belt above or on the abdomen where the fetus is located. The force of the seat belt during a collision will crush the fetus.
WARNING — Small chil- dren
Do not allow small children to ride in the vehicle without an appropriate child restraint sys- tem. If the shoulder belt comes in contact with your child’s neck or face your child is too small to ride in the vehicle. In a crash the seat belt will inflict injury to your child’s neck, throat and face.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 22
3 23
Safety features of your vehicle
Injured person A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommenda- tions.
One person per belt Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an acci- dent.
Do not lie down To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front seats should be in an upright position when the vehicle is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front seat is in a reclined position.
Care of seat belts Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addi- tion, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
Periodic inspection All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 23
Safety features of your vehicle
243
Keep belts clean and dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solu- tion and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts The entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt oper- ation should be directed to an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING — Pinched Seat belts
Make sure that the webbing and/or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat when returning the rear seatback to its upright position. A caught or pinched webbing/buckle may become damaged and could fail during a collision or sudden stop.
WARNING Seatbelts can become hot in a vehicle that has been closed up in sunny weather. They could burn infants and children.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 24
3 25
Safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS) Children under age 13 must always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to min- imize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, chil- dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children who are not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided. All 50 states have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices. The laws governing the age or height/weight restrictions at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among states, so you should be aware of the spe- cific requirements in your state, and where you are travelling. Child and/or infant safety seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a com- mercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are generally designed to be secured in vehicle seats by seat belt, or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH anchors. Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a par- ticular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the man- ufacturer when installing the child restraint system.
When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the luggage area or fasten it with a seat belt so that it will not be thrown forward in case of a sudden stop or an accident.WARNING — Restraint
location Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger’s seat. A child riding in the front pas- senger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating air bag.
WARNING — Hot child restraint
A child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle on a sunny day. Be sure to check the seat cover, buckles and latches before placing a child in the restraint system.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 25
Safety features of your vehicle
263
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend that the child restraint system be used in the rear seats. Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emer- gency conditions (emergency lock mode), you must manually change these seat belts to the auto lock mode to secure a child restraint. If the seat belt does not operate as described in this section, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING — Holding children
Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created dur- ing a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the cars interior. Always use a child restraint system which is appropriate for your child’s height and weight.
WARNING — Seat belt use Do not use one seat belt for two occupants at the same time. This will eliminate any safety benefit provided by the seat belt to the occupants.
CRS09
OTQ037038
Rear- facing child restraint system
Forward-facing child restraint system
WARNING — Unattended Children
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. The vehicle can heat up very quickly, resulting in injuries to the child in the vehicle.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 26
3 27
Safety features of your vehicle
NOTICE If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child seat system manual), the headrest of the respec- tive seating position shall be read- justed or entirely removed.
Placing a passenger seat belt into the auto lock mode
The auto lock mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the following procedure.
To install a child restraint system on the outboard or center rear seats, do the following: 1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoulder belt around or through the restraint, following the restraint manufactur- ers instructions. Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the dis- tinct click sound.
Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emer- gency.
WARNING — Child seat installation
Always follow the instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer. Child restraint system manufactur- ers know their products best.
Failure to observe this manu- al’s instructions regarding child restraint system and the instructions provided with the child restraint system could result in the improper installa- tion of the child restraint sys- tem which may reduce the protection to your child in a crash or a sudden stop.
E2MS103005
OEN036101
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 27
Safety features of your vehicle
283
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the Auto Lock (child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible clicking or ratchet- ing sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the Auto Lock mode. If no distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is in the Auto Lock mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the Auto Lock mode.
OEN036102 OEN036103 OEN036104
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 28
3 29
Safety features of your vehicle
The lap/shoulder belt automatically returns to the emergency lock mode whenever the belt is allowed to retract fully. Therefore, the preceding seven steps must be followed each time a child restraint is installed. To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Securing a child restraint seat with tether anchorage system
Child restraint hook holders are locat- ed on the package tray (4 Door) or the floor behind the rear seat (5 Door).
This symbol indicates the position of the tether anchor.
WARNING — Auto lock mode
Set the retractor to Automatic Lock mode when installing any child restraint system. If the retractor is not in the Auto Lock mode, the child restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops suddenly.
OSC037019N
OSC037029N
4 Door
5 Door
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 29
Safety features of your vehicle
303
1.Route the child restraint seat teth- er strap over the seatback. For vehicles with adjustable head- rests, route the tether strap under the headrest (remove the headrest and the re-install it) and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the appropriate child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the child restraint seat.
Check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing and pulling it in different directions. Incorrectly fitted child restraints may swing, twist, tip or separate causing death or serious injury.
Securing a child restraint seat with child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers make child restraint seats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com- patible child restraint seats. LATCH stands for «Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children». These seats include two rigid or webbing mount- ed attachments that connect to two LATCH anchors at specific seating positions in your vehicle. This type of child restraint seat eliminates the need to use seat belts to attach the child seat in the rear seats.
OTF030030N
WARNING — Tether strap Never mount more than one child restraint to a single tether or to a single lower anchorage point. The increased load caused by multiple seats may cause the tethers or anchorage points to break.
B230D01NF
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 30
3 31
Safety features of your vehicle
Child restraint symbols are located on the left and right rear seat backs to indicate the position of the lower anchors for child restraints.
LATCH anchors have been provided in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors are located in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration.There is no LATCH anchor provided for the center rear seating position. The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions. When you install your child’s restraint system using the LATCH anchors buckle the shoulder lap belt, then lock the retractor and pull the belt to remove the slack in the belt so it lies flat against the vehicle seat. Follow the child seat manufacturers instructions to properly install child restraint seats with LATCH or LATCH- compatible attachments. Once you have installed the LATCH child restraint, assure that the seat is properly attached to the LATCH and tether anchors. Also, test the child restraint seat before you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from side to side.Also try to tug the seat forward. Check to see if the anchors hold the seat in place.
NOTICE The recommended weight for the LATCH system is under 65 lb (30 kg). How to calculate the child restraint weight : Child restraint weight =
65 lb (30 kg) — Child weight
OTF030031N
Lower Anchor Position Indicator
Lower Anchor
WARNING — Unused rear seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts behind the child restraint seat when they are not used to secure the child seat. Failure to do so may result in child stran- gulation.
WARNING — LATCH lower anchors
Never attempt to attach a LATCH equipped seat in the center seating position. LATCH lower anchors are only to be used with the left and right rear outboard seating positions. You may damage the anchors or the anchors may fail and break in a collision.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 31
Safety features of your vehicle
323
(1) Drivers front air bag (2) Passengers front air bag (3) Side air bag (4) Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you and your passengers must always wear the safety belts provided in order to minimize the risk and sever- ity of injury in the event of a collision or rollover.
AIR BAG — ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OSC037030N
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 32
3 33
Safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system operate Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START the appropriate position.
Air bags inflate instantly in the event of serious frontal or side col- lision (if equipped with side air bag or curtain air bag) in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury. Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/ inflation signal.
Air bag deployment depends on a number of complex factors includ- ing vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision.Though, factors are not limited to those mentioned above. Airbags deploy depending on the severity and angle of the impact. Airbags do not deploy in every impact situation.
The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
In addition to inflating in certain side collisions, vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side and curtain air bags will inflate if the sensing system detects a rollover. When a rollover is detected, side and curtain air bags will remain inflated longer to help provide protection from ejection, especially when used in conjunction with the seat belts.
In order to help provide protection in a severe collision, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which a collision occurs and the need to get the air bag between the occu- pant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life- threatening injuries in a severe col- lision and is thus a necessary part of air bag design.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 33
Safety features of your vehicle
343
However, air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and bro- ken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.
There are even circumstances under which contact with the steering wheel or passenger air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the steering wheel or passenger air bag.
Noise and smoke When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and they leave smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breath- ing due to the contact of your chest to both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. Open your doors and/or windows as soon as possi- ble after the impact in order to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to smoke and powder. Though smoke and powder are non- toxic,They may cause irritation to the skin (eyes,nose and throat, etc). If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and consult a doctor if the symptom persists.
WARNING — Airbag Inflation
Sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining comfortable con- trol of the your vehicle. A dis- tance of at least 10″ (25cm) from your chest to the steering wheel is recommended. Failure to do so can result in airbag inflation injuries to the driver.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 34
3 35
Safety features of your vehicle
Installing a child restraint on a front passengers seat is forbidden
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passengers seat. If the air bag deploys, it would impact the rear-facing child restraint, causing serious or fatal injury. In addition, do not place front-facing child restraint in the front passen- gers seat either. If the front passen- ger air bag inflates, it would cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.
WARNING — Hot components
Do not touch the air bag storage area’s internal components immediately after air bag infla- tion. The air bag related parts in the steering wheel, instrument panel and the roof rails above the front and rear doors are very hot. Hot components can result in burn injuries.
1JBH3051
WARNING — Air bag deployment
When children are seated in the rear outboard seats of a vehicle equipped with side and/or cur- tain air bags, install the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible. Inflation of the side and/or cur- tain air bags could impact the child.
WARNING Do not install or place any accessories near air bag deployment areas, such as the instrument panel, windows, pil- lars, and roof rails.
WARNING Do not install or place any accessories new air bag deploy- ment areas.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/25/2018 12:04 PM Page 35
Safety features of your vehicle
363
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag — Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). When the ignition switch is turned ON, the indicator light should illumi- nate for approximately 6 seconds, then go off.
Have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer if: The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON. The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds. The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
SRS components and func- tions
The SRS consists of the following components: 1. Driver’s front air bag module 2. Passenger’s front air bag module 3. Side air bag modules 4. Curtain air bag modules 5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem-
blies* 6. Air bag warning light 7. SRS control module (SRSCM) /
Rollover sensor
W7-147
OTF032049N
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 36
3 37
Safety features of your vehicle
8. Front impact sensors 9. Side impact sensors 10. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator (Front passengers seat only)
11. Occupant detection system (Front passengers seat only)
12. Drivers and front passengers seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
* : if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all SRS components while the ignition switch is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment. The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, after which the air bag warning light should go out. If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction of the SRS. Have an authorized Kia dealer inspect the air bag system as soon as possible. The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON. The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds. The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
The air bag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger’s panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.
B240B01L
Drivers front air bag (1)
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:47 PM Page 37
Safety features of your vehicle
383
Upon deployment, tear seams mold- ed directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina- tion with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver’s or the passenger’s forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain for- ward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.
B240B03L
Drivers front air bag (3)
B240B02L
Drivers front air bag (2)
B240B05L
Passengers front air bag
WARNING — Air bag obstructions
Do not install or place any accessories on the steering wheel, instrument panel, or on the front passenger’s panel above the glove box in a vehicle Such objects may become dan- gerous projectiles if the air bag deploys.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 38
3 39
Safety features of your vehicle
If an air bag deploys, there may be a loud noise followed by a fine dust released in the vehicle. These con- ditions are normal and are not haz- ardous — the air bags are packed in this fine powder. The dust generat- ed during air bag deployment may cause skin or eye irritation as well as aggravate asthma for some per- sons. Always wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly with cold water and a mild soap after an accident in which the air bags were deployed.
The SRS can function only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or contin- uously remains on after illuminat- ing for about 6 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, or after the engine is started, comes on while driving, the SRS is not working properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
NOTICE Before you replace a fuse or discon- nect a battery terminal, turn the igni- tion switch to the LOCK position and remove the ignition key. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS air bag warning light to illuminate.
Occupant detection system
Your vehicle is equipped with an occu- pant detection system in the front passenger’s seat. The occupant detection system is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the passenger’s front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. Only the front passenger front air bag is controlled by the Occupant Detection System. Do not put anything in front of the passenger air bag indicator.
WARNING — Flying objects Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dan- gerous projectiles if the side airbag inflates.
OSC037020N
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 39
Safety features of your vehicle
403
Main components of occupant detection system A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion. An electronic system which deter-
mines whether the passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.
An indicator light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the words PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicating the front passen- ger air bag system is deactivated.
The instrument panel air bag warn- ing light is interconnected with the occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person that the system deter- mines to be of adult size, and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, cen- tered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extend- ed and their feet on the floor), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- tor will turn off and the front passen- ger’s air bag will be able to inflate, if necessary, in frontal crashes. You will find the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator on the center facia panel. This system detects the condi- tions 1~4 in the following table and acti- vates or deactivates the front passen- ger air bag based on these conditions. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly (sitting upright with the seat in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion, with the persons legs comfortably extended, feet on the floor, and wearing the safety belt prop- erly) for the most effective protection by the air bag and the safety belt.
The ODS (Occupant Detection System) may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can defeat the detection system. These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position. (2) Leaning against the door or cen-
ter console. (3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat. (4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt. (6) Reclining the seat back.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 40
3 41
Safety features of your vehicle
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system
*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child than the same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.
*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is a normal condition.
Condition detected by the occupant detection system
1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2
2. Infant or child restraint system
with 12 months old*3 *4
3. Unoccupied
4. Malfunction in the system
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
tor light
SRS warning light
Front passenger air bag
Indicator/Warning light Devices
CAUTION Do not install a child restraint
seat in the passenger seat when the seat is heavily soaked with any type of liquid.
Do not alter or remodel the ODS (Occupant Detection System).This may damage the system and prevent its proper function in a collision.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 41
Safety features of your vehicle
423
OJFA035106
— Never sit with hips shifted towards the front of the seat.
OJFA035104
— Do not place a heavy load in the front passenger seatback pocket or on the front passen- ger seat.
OJFA035105
— Do not place feet on the front passenger seatback.
WARNING — ODS System Riding in an improper position adversely affects the Occupant Detection System and may result in the deactivation of the front passenger airbag. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger as to the proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.
(Continued)
OJFA035107
— Never excessively recline the front passenger seatback.
OJFA035100
— Do not sit on the passenger seat wearing heavily padded clothes such as ski wear and hip protector.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 42
3 43
Safety features of your vehicle
OJFA035109
— Never lean on the door or cen- ter console.
— Never sit on one side of the front passenger seat.
OJFA035108
— Never place feet on the dash- board.
OJFA035101
— Do not use car seat acces- sories such as thick blankets and cushions which cover up the car seat surface.
(Continued)
OJFA035102
— Do not place electronic devices such as laptops, DVD player, or conductive materi- als such as water bottles on the passenger seat.
Do not use electronic devices such as laptops and satellite radios which use inverter chargers.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 43
Safety features of your vehicle
443
When an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator is on, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- tion and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the engine and have the person remain in that position. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator is still on, ask the passen- ger to move to the rear seat.
WARNING — Wet Passenger Seat
Do not spill liquid in the pas- senger seat. Spilled liquid on the passenger seat may cause the air bag warning light to illu- minate or malfunction. If any liq- uid is spilled, make sure the seat has been completely dried before driving the vehicle.
B990A01O
WARNING — AIR BAG OFF light
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a crash. The driver must instruct the passenger to reposi- tion himself in the seat. Failure to properly position yourself may lead to air bag deactivation resulting in air bag non-deploy- ment in a collision. If the PAS- SENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- tor remains illuminated after the passenger repositions them- selves properly and the car is restarted, it is recommended that passenger move to the rear seat because the passenger’s front air bag will not deploy.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 44
3 45
Safety features of your vehicle
NOTICE Do not use car seat cushions that
cover up the surface of the seat and aftermarket manufactured passenger seat heaters.
After conducting car interior clean- ing using steam or detergent, the seat should be dried properly. Afterward, check for normal oper- ation of the PASS AIR BAG OFF and air bag warning lights.
Any service related to the passen- ger seat and the ODS must be done at Kia service center.
After the passenger seat has been removed or installed for repair purposes, check for normal opera- tion of the PASS AIR BAG OFF and air bag warning lights with a person seated or not seated in the passenger seat.
NOTICE When the PASS AIR BAG OFF symbol is illuminated, the passenger air bag system will not operate. The passenger air bag system will oper- ate when necessary if the symbol is not illuminated.
NOTICE Do not modify or replace the front passenger seat. Don’t place anything on or attach anything such as a blan- ket, front seat cover or after market seat heater to the front passenger seat. This can adversely affect the occupant detection system.
WARNING — ODS System Riding in an improper position adversely affects the Occupant Detection System and may result in the deactivation of the front passenger airbag. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger as to the proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 45
Safety features of your vehicle
463
NOTICE The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator illuminates for about 4 sec- onds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or after the engine is started. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the occu- pant detection sensor will then clas- sify the front passenger after several more seconds.
Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat. Children too large for child restraints should use the available lap/shoulder belts. No matter what type of crash, children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.
If the occupant detection system is not working properly, the SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate because the pas- senger’s front air bag is connected with the occupant detection system. If there is a malfunction of the occupant detection system, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator will not illu- minate and the passenger’s front air bag will inflate in frontal impact crash- es even if there is no occupant in the front passenger’s seat.
NOTICE Air bags can only be used once — have an authorized Kia dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment.
WARNING — ODS Interference
Do not place a heavy load or an active electronic device (ex. laptop computer, after market DMB/navigat ion/sate l l i te audio, video game machine, MP3, etc.) in the front passen- ger seatback pocket or on the front passenger seat.
Do not hang any items such as seatback table on the front passenger seatback.
Do not place feet on the front passenger seatback.
Do not place any items under the front passenger seat.
Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat. These may damage the occu- pant detection system, if they puncture the seat cushion.
Do not spill any liquids on the seat.
(Continued)
(Continued) Any of the above could interfere with the proper operation of the ODS sensor thereby increasing the risk of an injury in an acci- dent.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 46
3 47
Safety features of your vehicle
Even though your vehicle is equipped with the occupant detec- tion system, never install a child restraint system in the front pas- senger’s seat. A deploying air bag can forcefully strike a child result- ing in serious injuries or death. Any child age 12 and under should ride in the rear seat. Children too large for child restraints should use the available lap/shoulder belts. No matter what type of crash, children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated when the front passenger’s seat is occu- pied by an adult and he/she sits properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor), have that person sit in the rear seat.
Driver’s and passenger’s front air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an Advanced Supplemental Restraint (Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passen- ger seating position.
The indications of the system’s pres- ence are the letters «AIR BAG» embossed on the air bag pad cover in the steering wheel and the pas- senger’s side front panel pad above the glove box. The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger’s side front panel above the glove box. The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle’s driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt sys- tem alone in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driver’s seat position, the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt usage and impact severity. The seat belt buckle sensors deter- mine if the driver and front passen- ger’s seat belts are fastened.
OYB036038
OYB036022
Drivers front air bag
Passengers front air bag
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 47
Safety features of your vehicle
483
These sensors provide the ability to control the SRS deployment based on whether or not the seat belts are fas- tened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation with two levels. A first stage level is pro- vided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts.
The passengers front air bag is designed to help reduce the injury of children sitting close to the instru- ment panel in low speed collisions. However, children are safer if they are restraint in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity, seating position and seat belt usage, the SRSCM (SRS Control Module) controls the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped with an occupant detection system in the front passenger’s seat. The occu- pant detection system detects the presence of a passenger in the front passenger’s seat and will turn off the front passenger’s air bag under cer- tain conditions. For more detail, see Occupant detection system in this section. Do not place any objects that may cause magnetic fields near the front seat.These may cause a malfunction of the seat track position sensor.
Modification to the seat structure can cause the air bag to deploy at a dif- ferent level than should be provided.
Manufacturers are required by gov- ernment regulations to provide a contact point concerning modifica- tions to the vehicle for persons with disabilities, which modifications may affect the vehicles advanced air bag system. That contact is Kias toll-free Customer Assistance center at 1- 800-333-4Kia. However, Kia does not endorse nor will it support any changes to any part or structure of the vehicle that could affect the advanced air bag system, including the occupant detection system.
WARNING — Replacement
/Modifications The front passenger seat, dash- board or door should not be replaced except by an authorized Kia dealer using original Kia parts designed for this vehicle and model. Any other such replace- ment or modification could adversely affect the operation of the occupant detection system and your advanced air bags.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 48
3 49
Safety features of your vehicle
Advanced air bags are combined with pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide enhanced occupant protec- tion in frontal crashes. Front air bags are not intended to deploy in colli- sions in which sufficient protection can be provided by the pre-tensioner seat belt alone.
Front air bags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. However, when frontal deployment threshold is satis- fied at side-impact, front air bags may deploy. In addition, front air bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold.
WARNING — SRS Wiring Do not tamper with or discon- nect SRS wiring or other com- ponents of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental deployment of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
1JBB3520
1JBA3514
1JBA3522
Side impact
Rear impact
Rollover
WARNING — No attaching objects
No objects (such as crash pad cover, cellular phone holder, cup holder, perfume or stickers) should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windshield glass, and the front passenger’s panel above the glove box. Such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy. Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 49
Safety features of your vehicle
503
Side air bag
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front seat.
The purpose of the air bag is to pro- vide the vehicle’s driver and/or the front passenger with additional pro- tection than that offered by the seat belt alone. The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. However, when side deploy- ment threshold is satisfied at front- impact, side air bags may deploy.
The side air bags may deploy on the side of the impact or on both sides.
The side and/or curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle will deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected.
The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.
WARNING Never place or insert any object into any small opening near side airbag labels attached to the vehicle seats. When the air bag deploys, the object may affect the deployment and result in unexpected accident or bodily harm.
OYB036023
OYB036024
Front
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 50
3 51
Safety features of your vehicle
The side air bag is supplemental to the driver’s and the passenger’s seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in operation. For best protection from the side air bag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side air bag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver’s hands should be placed on the steer- ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 posi- tions. The passenger’s arms and hands should be placed on their laps.
If seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. Inform that your vehicle is equipped with side air bags and an occupant detection system.
WARNING — Unexpected deployment
Avoid impact to the side air bag sensor when the ignition switch is ON to prevent unexpected deployment of the side air bag.
WARNING — Deployment Do not install any accessories including seat covers, on the side or near the side air bag as this may affect the deployment of the side air bags.
WARNING — Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dan- gerous projectiles if the side air bag inflates.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 51
Safety features of your vehicle
523
Curtain air bag
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors. They are designed to help protect occupants in certain side impacts and to help prevent them from eject- ing out of the vehicle as a result of a rollover, especially when the seat- belts are also in use. The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. However, when side deploy- ment threshold is satisfied at front- impact, side air bags may deploy.
The curtain air bags may deploy on the side of the impact or on both sides.
Also, the curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle will deploy in certain rollover situations.
The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.
WARNING — No attaching objects
Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar.
Do not place any objects between the door and the seat. They may become dan- gerous projectiles if the side air bag inflates.
Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bags.
Do not hang heavy items on the coat hooks for safety rea- sons.
Never place or insert any object into any small opening near side airbag labels attached to the vehicle seats. When the air bag deploys, the object may affect the deploy- ment and result in unexpected accident or bodily harm.
OYB036026
OYB036025
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 52
3 53
Safety features of your vehicle
Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and pas- sengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or cur- tain air bags.
NOTICE Never try to open or repair any com- ponents of the side curtain air bag system. This should only be done by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING — No attaching objects
Do not place any objects over the air bag. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar, roof side rail.
Do not hang hard or breakable objects on the clothes hanger.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:48 PM Page 53
Safety features of your vehicle
543
Why didnt my air bag go off in a collision? (Inflation and non- inflation conditions of the air bag) There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional pro- tection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module/ Rollover sensor
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (4) Pressure side impact sensor
OSC037013N/OYB036032/OSC037024N/OYB036033/OYB036034
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:49 PM Page 54
3 55
Safety features of your vehicle
Problems may arise if the sensor installation angles are changed due to the deformation of the front bumper, body or B pillar where side collision sensors are installed. Have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. Installing aftermarket bumper guards or replacing a bumper with non-gen- uine parts may adversely affect your vehicles collision and air bag deploy- ment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the severity of impact of the front col- lision.
1JBA3513
WARNING — Air bag sensors
Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bag or sensors are installed. This may cause unexpected air bag deployment, which could result in serious per- sonal injury or death.
If the installation location or angle of the sensors is altered in any way, the air bags may deploy when they should not or they may not deploy when they should. Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. Have the vehi- cle checked and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:49 PM Page 55
Safety features of your vehicle
563
The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Side air bags
Side air bags (side and/or curtain air bags) are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the severity of impact resulting from a side impact collision.
Also, the side and/or curtain air bags are designed to inflate when a rollover is detected by a rollover sensor. Although the front air bags (drivers and front passengers air bags) are designed to inflate in frontal colli- sions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient frontal force in another type of impact. Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in certain side impact colli- sions. They may inflate in other types of collisions where a side force is detected by the sensors. Side air bag and/or curtain air bags may also inflate where rollover sensors indi- cate the possibility of a rollover occurring (even if none actually occurs) or in other situations, includ- ing when the vehicle is tilted while being towed.
Even where side and/or curtain air bags would not provide impact pro- tection in a rollover, however, they will deploy to prevent ejection of occupants, especially those who are restrained with seat belts. If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads or sidewalks, air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unim- proved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.
1JBA3516
OYDDSA2040
SC USA 3.QXP 7/25/2018 12:04 PM Page 56
3 57
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bag non-inflation conditions
In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the pro- tection of the seat belts in such col- lisions.
Air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occu- pants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit.
Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move to the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, front air bag deployment would not provide additional occu- pant protection.
1JBA3516
1JBA3515
OED036100
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:49 PM Page 57
Safety features of your vehicle
583
In a slant or angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to pro- vide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.
Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehi- cle causing it to ride under a vehi- cle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this under-ride situation because deceleration forces that are detect- ed by sensors may be significantly replaced by such under-ride colli- sions.
Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection. However, side and curtain air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled over.
1JBA35221JBA35171JBA3521
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:49 PM Page 58
3 59
Safety features of your vehicle
Air bags may not inflate if the vehi- cle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sen- sors.
SRS Care The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger’s panel, and front seats must be performed by an authorized Kia dealer. Improper han- dling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.
1JBA3518
WARNING — Tampering with SRS
Do not tamper with or discon- nect SRS wiring, or other com- ponents of the SRS system. Doing so could result in the accidental inflation of the air bags or render the SRS inoper- ative.
WARNING — Towing Vehicle Always have the ignition switch in the LOCK position when your vehicle is being towed. The side air bags may inflate if the vehi- cle is tilted such as when being towed because of the rollover sensors in the vehicle.
SC USA 3.QXP 7/25/2018 12:04 PM Page 59
Safety features of your vehicle
603
If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. An authorized Kia dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to fol- low these precautions and proce- dures could increase the risk of per- sonal injury.
Adding equipment to or modi- fying your air bag-equipped vehicle If you modify your vehicle by chang- ing your vehicle’s frame, bumper sys- tem, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the opera- tion of your vehicle’s air bag system
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system.
NOTICE Be sure to read all of the informa- tion about the air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owner`s Manual.
OSC037021N
SC USA 3.QXP 7/18/2018 5:49 PM Page 60
Features of your vehicle
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Remote keyless entry system operations. . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Theft-alarm stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Operating door locks from outside the vehicle. . . . . 4-12
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle. . . . . . 4-13
Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Child-protector rear door lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Trunk (for 4 door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Opening the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Closing the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Emergency trunk safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Tailgate (for 5 door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Opening the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Closing the tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Emergency tailgate safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Manual windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28 Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Hood open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Tilting the sunroof. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Sunshade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Electric Power Steering (EPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Tilt and telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
4
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 1
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Instrument cluster control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
LCD window control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Transmission shift indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
LCD windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Trip information (Trip computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
LCD modes (for Type B cluster) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
User settings mode (for Type B cluster) . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
Indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Rear view monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Rear view monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Headlight escort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Headlight welcome function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
High beam operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83 Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
Windshield washers (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Rear window wiper and washer switch (for 5 door). . 4-87
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88 Automatic turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Room lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Luggage room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-91
Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93 Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Checking the amount of air conditioner
refrigerant and compressor lubricant. . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Air Conditioning refrigerant label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
4
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 2
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105 Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-112
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-114 Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-115
Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119 Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Luggage net holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-123
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
USB charger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-125
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Shopping bag holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-127
Covering shelf (for 5 door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
4
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 3
Features of your vehicle
44
Record your key number The key code num- ber is stamped on the key code tag attached to the key set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will enable an authorized Kia dealer to duplicate the keys easily. Remove the key code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the key code number and keep it in a safe and handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Key operations Folding key
To unfold the key, press the release button then the key will unfold auto- matically. To fold the key, fold the key manually while pressing the release button
KEYS
WARNING — Aftermarket keys
Use only Kia original parts for the ignition key in your vehicle. If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not return to ON after START. If this happens, the starter will continue to oper- ate causing possible fire due to excessive current in the wiring.
OSC047004N
Folding key
CAUTION — Key button operation
Do not fold the key without pressing the release button. This may damage the key.
WARNING — Ignition key Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised chil- dren. Leaving children unat- tended in a vehicle with a man- ual ignition key is dangerous. Children copy adults and they could place the key in the igni- tion switch or press the start button. The key would enable children to operate power win- dows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or death.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 4
4 5
Features of your vehicle
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED) Remote keyless entry system operations
Lock (1) All doors (and hood, trunk/tailgate) are locked if the lock button is pressed. If all doors (and hood, trunk/tailgate) are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once to indicate that all doors (and hood, trunk/tail- gate) are locked.
Also, if the lock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds, the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once to confirm that the door is locked (If equipped). However, if any door remains open, the hazard warning lights (and/or the chime) will not operate. But if all doors are closed after the lock button is pressed, the hazard warning lights will blink once.
Unlock (2) The driver’s door is unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once. The hazard warning lights will blink twice and the chime will sound twice to indicate that the drivers door is unlocked. All doors are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed once more within 4 seconds. The hazard warning lights will blink twice again to indicate that all doors are unlocked. After pressing this button, the doors will lock auto- matically unless you open any door within 30 seconds. If you attempt to lock or unlock the door by pressing the door lock/unlock button in any of the fol- lowing states, the door will not be locked or unlocked. — When you want to lock or unlock
the door in the ACC or ON state. — When you want to lock a door in a
car with one or more doors open. Depending on the vehicle, the driver can turn off or set the TWO PRESS UNLOCK setting function.
OYDDCO2003
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 5
Features of your vehicle
64
NOTICE If the keyless entry system is inoper- ative due to exposure to water or liq- uids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty.
Trunk open (3) The trunk is opened if the button is pressed for more than 1 second.
Tailgate unlock (3) The tailgate is unlocked if the button is pressed for more than 1 second. However, after pressing this button, the tailgate will lock automatically unless you open the tailgate within 30 seconds. Also, once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate will lock automatically.
Alarm (4) The horn sounds and the hazard warning lights blink for about 30 sec- onds if this button is pressed for more than 0.5 seconds. To stop the horn and lights, press any button on the transmitter.
Transmitter precautions The transmitter will not work if any of following occurs: The ignition key is in the ignition
switch. You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]). The battery in the transmitter is
weak. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. The weather is extremely cold. The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the trans- mitter.
When the transmitter does not work properly, open and close the door with the ignition key. If you have a problem with the transmitter, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 6
4 7
Features of your vehicle
If the transmitter is in close proxim- ity to your cell phone or smart phone, the signal from the trans- mitter could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. This is especially important when the phone is active such as making calls, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or send- ing/receiving emails. Avoid placing the transmitter and your cell phone or smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry sys- tem is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli- ance, it will not be covered by your manufacturers vehicle warranty.
Battery replacement
A battery should last for several years, but if the transmitter is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one. If you are unsure how to use or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
OYDDCO2005
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 7
Features of your vehicle
84
Type A 1. Pry open the transmitter cover. 2. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery position is correct.
3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.
Type B 1. Remove the mechanical key. 2. Pry open the rear cover. 3. Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, make sure the battery position is correct.
4. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.
The transmitter is designed to give you years of trouble-free use, how- ever it can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity. If you are unsure how to use or replace the battery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
Using the wrong battery can cause the transmitter to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery.
An inappropriately dis- posed battery can be harm- ful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.
Immobilizer system (if equipped) Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer sys- tem to reduce the risk of unautho- rized vehicle use. Your immobilizer system is com- prised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices inside the vehicle. With the immobilizer system, when- ever you insert your ignition key into the ignition switch and turn it to ON, it checks and determines and verifies that the ignition key is valid. If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start. If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start.
CAUTION — Transmitter damage
The transmitter can malfunction if dropped, exposed to moisture, static electricity, heat or direct sunlight.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 8
4 9
Features of your vehicle
To deactivate the immobilizer system: Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer sys- tem: Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi- tion. The immobilizer system acti- vates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle, the engine will not start. Your Immobilizer password is a cus- tomer unique password and should be kept confidential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle.
NOTICE Keep each key separately in order to avoid a starting malfunction.
Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch. Metal accessories may interrupt the transponder signal and may prevent the engine from being started. If you need additional keys or lose your keys, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION — Immobilizer alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could cause the immobilizer system to malfunction.
CAUTION — Immobilizer damage
Do not expose your immobilizer system to moisture, static elec- tricity or rough handling. This may damage your immobilizer.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 9
Features of your vehicle
104
This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the vehicle. This system is operat- ed in three stages: the first is the «Armed» stage, the second is the «Theft-alarm» stage, and the third is the «Disarmed» stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the hazard warning lights.
Armed stage Using the transmitter Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below. 1.Turn off the engine and remove the
ignition key from the ignition switch.
2.Make sure that all doors (and tail- gate), the engine hood are closed and latched.
3.Lock the doors by pressing the lock button on the transmitter. After completion of the steps above, the hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed. If any door (and tailgate) or engine hood remains open, the hazard warning lights won’t operate and theft-alarm will not arm. After this, if all doors (and tailgate) and engine hood are closed, the hazard warn- ing lights blink once.
Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the vehi- cle. If the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the vehicle, the alarm may be acti- vated when the remaining pas- senger(s) leave the vehicle. If any door, tailgate or engine hood is opened within 30 sec- onds after entering the armed stage, the system is disarmed to prevent unnecessary alarm.
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage Disarmed
stage
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 10
4 11
Features of your vehicle
Theft-alarm stage The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs while the system is armed. A front or rear door is opened without
using the mechanical key or trans- mitter.
The trunk/tailgate is opened with- out using the mechanical key or transmitter.
The engine hood is opened. The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously for approximately 27 seconds. To turn off the system, unlock the doors with the transmitter.
Disarmed stage The system will be disarmed when:
Transmitter — The door unlock button is pressed. — The engine is started. (within 3
seconds) — The ignition switch is in the «ON»
position for 30 seconds or more.
After the doors are unlocked, the haz- ard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed. After pressing the unlock button, if any door (or trunk/tailgate) is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.
NOTICE Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The vehicle starting motor is disabled during the theft-alarm stage. If the system is not disarmed with the transmitter, insert the key into the ignition switch, turn the igni- tion switch to the ON position and wait for 30 seconds. Then the sys- tem will be disarmed.
If you lose your keys, consult your authorized Kia dealer.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 11
Features of your vehicle
124
DOOR LOCKS Operating door locks from outside the vehicle
Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to lock and toward the front of the vehicle to unlock.
If you lock/unlock the door with a key, all vehicle doors will lock/unlock automatically.
From the drivers door, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle once to unlock the drivers door and once more within 4 seconds to unlock all doors.
Doors can also be locked and unlocked with the transmitter key. (if equipped)
Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.
When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure the doors are closed securely.
NOTICE In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing con- ditions.
If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.
OYB046011
Unlock
Lock
Unlock
Lock
WARNING Securely close your door
before you begin driving. Failure to fully close your door may cause it to open during vehicle operation.
Keep your body out of the way of the closing door to prevent injuries.
CAUTION Do not open and close the door repeatedly if unnecessary or with excessive force. Such action can damage the vehicle door.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 12
4 13
Features of your vehicle
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle With the door lock button
To unlock a door, pull the door lock button (1) to the Unlock position. The red mark on the button will be visible.
To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the Lock position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark on the door lock button will not show.
To open a door, pull the door han- dle (2) outward.
If the inner door handle of the front door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button will unlock and the door will open.
Front doors cannot be locked if the ignition key is in the ignition switch and any front door is opened.
If a power door lock ever fails to func- tion while you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following tech- niques to exit: Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.
Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.
Lower a front window and use the key to unlock the door from out- side.
WARNING If adult passengers must remain in the vehicle while it is very hot or cold outside, there is risk of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the out- side when there are adult pas- sengers in the vehicle.
OSC046002
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 13
Features of your vehicle
144
With central door lock switch (if equipped)
Operate by pressing the central door lock switch. Press the switch to the Lock posi-
tion (1), all vehicle doors will lock.
Press the switch to the Unlock position (2), all vehicle doors will unlock.
If the key is in the ignition switch and any front door is opened, the doors will not lock when the Lock position (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.
OSC047020N
Passengers door
Driver’s door
OSC046003
WARNING — Doors The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to pre- vent accidental opening of the door.
Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motor- cycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door. Opening a door when something is approaching can cause dam- age or injury.
WARNING — Unattended children/animals
Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or severe injury to unattended chil- dren or animals who cannot escape the vehicle.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 14
4 15
Features of your vehicle
Impact sensing door unlock system (if equipped) All doors will automatically unlock when an impact causes the air bags to deploy.
Auto door lock/unlock feature (if equipped) All doors will automatically lock
when the transmission shift lever is shifted out of P (Park).
All doors will automatically unlock when the transmission shift lever is shifted into P (Park).
Speed sensing door lock sys- tem (if equipped) All doors will be automatically locked after the vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph. And all doors will be automati- cally unlocked when you turn the engine off or when you remove the ignition key. An authorized Kia dealer can acti- vate or deactivate some auto door lock/ unlock features as follows; Auto door unlock by using the dri-
ver’s door lock button Auto door lock/unlock by shifting
the transmission shift lever out of P (Park) or into P (Park)
Auto door unlock when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch
If you want to activate or deactivate some door lock/unlock feature, con- sult an authorized Kia dealer.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children from acciden- tally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should be used whenev- er children are in the vehicle. 1. Open the rear door. 2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
hole and turn it to the lock ( ) position. the child safety lock locat- ed on the rear edge of the door to the lock position. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, rear door will not open even when the inner door handle is pulled.
OYB046015
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 15
Features of your vehicle
164
3. Close the rear door. To open the rear door, pull the out- side door handle. Even though the doors may be unlocked, the rear door will not open by pulling the inner door handle until the rear door child safety lock is unlocked.
WARNING — Rear door locks
Use the rear door safety locks whenever children are in the vehicle. If a child accidently opens the rear doors while the vehicle is motion, he can fall out.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 16
4 17
Features of your vehicle
Opening the trunk
To open the trunk from inside the vehicle, pull the trunk lid release lever. Once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk locks automati- cally.
NOTICE In cold and wet climates, trunk lock and trunk mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
Closing the trunk To close, lower the trunk lid, then press down on it until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid is securely fas- tened, always check by trying to pull it up again.
TRUNK (FOR 4 DOOR)
OSC047021N
CAUTION Make certain that you close the trunk before driving your vehi- cle. Possible damage may occur to attached hardware if the trunk is not closed prior to driving.
WARNING The trunk swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the trunk.
WARNING — Exhaust Fumes
The trunk lid should always be kept completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may enter the car and serious illness or death may result.
WARNING No one should be allowed to occupy the trunk at any time. The trunk is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 17
Features of your vehicle
184
Emergency trunk safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency trunk release lever locat- ed inside the trunk. If someone is inadvertently locked in the trunk, moving the handle in the direction of the arrow will release the trunk latch mechanism and open the trunk.
No one should be allowed to occupy the trunk at any time. The trunk is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash. Use the release lever for emergen- cies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.
OSC048140N
Type B
Type A
OSC047022N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 18
4 19
Features of your vehicle
Opening the tailgate
The tailgate is locked or unlocked when all doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter or central door lock switch.
If unlocked, the tailgate can be opened by pressing the handle and pulling it up.
When all doors are lock if the tail- gate unlock button on the transmit- ter is pressed for more than 1 sec- ond, the tailgate is unlocked. Once the tailgate is opened and then closed, the tailgate is locked auto- matically.
There is no key hole.
NOTICE In cold and wet climates, tailgate lock and tailgate mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
Closing the tailgate
To close the tailgate, lower and push down the tailgate firmly. Make sure that the tailgate is securely latched. Make sure your hands, feet and other parts of your body are safely out of the way before closing the tail- gate.
TAILGATE (FOR 5 DOOR)
CAUTION — Tailgate lift cylinders
Make certain that you close the tailgate before driving your vehi- cle. Possible damage may occur to the tailgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the tailgate is not closed prior to driving.
OSC047439NOYB046039
WARNING The tailgate swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the tailgate.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:35 PM Page 19
Features of your vehicle
204
Emergency tailgate safety release
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. If someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment. The tailgate can be opened by doing as follows: 1. Input the mechanical key into the
hole. 2. Push the mechanical key to the
right. 3. Push up the tailgate.
WARNING — Exhaust fumes
If you drive with the tailgate open, you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause serious injury or death to vehicle occupants. If you must drive with the tail- gate open, keep the air vents and all windows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle.
WARNING — Riding in cargo area
Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained.
CAUTION — Closing tail- gate
Make sure nothing is near the tailgate latch and striker while closing the tailgate. It may dam- age the tailgate’s latch.
OSC047440N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 20
4 21
Features of your vehicle
WARNING No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk at any time. The trunk is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.
Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use with extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 21
Features of your vehicle
224
(1) Drivers door power window switch (2) Front passengers door power
window switch (3) Rear door (left) power window
switch* (4) Rear door (right) power window
switch* (5) Window opening and closing (6) Automatic power window
UP*/DOWN* (Driver`s window) (7) Power window lock button*
*: if equipped
NOTICE In cold and wet climates, power win- dows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.
WINDOWS
OSC046016
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 22
4 23
Features of your vehicle
Power windows (if equipped) The ignition switch must be in the ON position for power windows to oper- ate. Each door has a power window switch that controls the doors win- dow. The driver has a power window lock switch which can block the oper- ation of rear passenger windows. The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the ignition key is removed or is set to the ACC or LOCK position. However, if the front doors are opened, the power windows cannot be operated even within the 30 second period. If the window cannot be closed because it is blocked by objects, remove the objects and close the window.
NOTICE While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) in an open (or partially open) position, your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a nor- mal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the follow- ing actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately one inch. If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing (if equipped)
The drivers door has a master power window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle. To open or close a window, press down or pull up the front portion of the corresponding switch to the first detent position (5).
OYB046019
CAUTION Do not install any accessories in the vehicle that extend into the open window area. Such objects will impact the proper function of the Automatic rever- sal jam protection feature described on Automatic rever- sal section of this manual.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 23
Features of your vehicle
244
Auto down window (if equipped) (Drivers window)
Pressing the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers the drivers window even when the switch is released. To stop the win- dow at the desired position while the window is in operation, briefly pull up the switch to the opposite direction of the window movement.
Auto up/down window (if equipped)
Pressing or pulling up the power win- dow switch momentarily to the sec- ond detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press and release the switch to the opposite direction of the movement. If the power window is not operated correctly, the automatic power win- dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Close the window and continue pulling up on the drivers power window switch for at least 1 second after the window is completely closed.
OSC046015
OYB046020
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 24
4 25
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal (if equipped)
If the upward movement of the win- dow is blocked by an object or part of the body, the window will detect the resistance and will stop upward movement. The window will then lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm) to allow the object to be cleared. If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).
And if the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window rever- sal will not operate. The automatic reverse feature for the drivers window is only active when the auto up feature is used by fully pulling up the switch. The automatic reverse feature will not operate if the window is raised using the halfway position on the power window switch.
WARNING The automatic reverse feature doesnt activate while resetting power window system. Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
WARNING Always check for obstructions before raising any window to avoid injuries or vehicle dam- age. If an object less than 0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter is caught between the window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse window may not detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse direc- tion.
OUN026013 WARNING Do not install any accessories in the vehicle that extend into the open window area. Such objects could prevent the auto- matic reverse feature from func- tioning.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 25
Features of your vehicle
264
Power window lock button (if equipped)
The driver can disable the power window switches on the rear passen- gers’ doors by pressing the power window lock switch to the lock posi- tion (pressed). When the power window lock switch is pressed: The driver’s master control can
operate all the power windows. The front passenger’s control
can operate the front passen- ger’s power window.
The rear passenger’s control cannot operate the rear passen- ger’s power window.
Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window.
CAUTION — Opening/closing Window
To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.
OSC046017
WARNING — Power win- dows
Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the power window lock button (on the driver’s door) in the LOCK (pressed) position.
Do not extend a face or arms outside through the window opening while driving.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 26
4 27
Features of your vehicle
Manual windows (if equipped)
To raise or lower the window, turn the window regulator handle clockwise or counterclockwise.
WARNING When opening or closing the windows, make sure your pas- senger’s arms, hands and body are safely out of the way.
OSA028222
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 27
Features of your vehicle
284
Opening the hood
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift lever to the P (Park) position for Automatic Transmission and setting the parking brake.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, push the second- ary latch (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood (2).
3. Pull the support rod from the hood.
4. Hold the hood open with the sup- port rod.
HOOD
OYB046022
OSC047447N OYB046024
WARNING — Hot parts Grasp the support rod in the area wrapped in rubber. The rubber will help prevent you from being burned by hot metal when the engine is hot.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 28
4 29
Features of your vehicle
Closing the hood 1. Before closing the hood, check the
following: All filler caps in the engine com-
partment must be correctly installed.
Gloves, rags or any other com- bustible material must be removed from the engine com- partment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood until it is about 1ft (30 cm) above the closed position and let it drop. Make sure that it locks into place.
4. Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a lit- tle more force.
Hood open warning (if equipped)
The warning message will appear on the LCD display when hood is open. The warning chime will operate when the vehicle is being driven at or above 2 mph (3 km/h) with the hood open.
WARNING — Fire risk Do not leave gloves, rags or any other combustible material in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire.
OSC047125N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 29
Features of your vehicle
304
CAUTION Before closing the hood, ensure that all obstructions are removed from the engine com- partment and surrounding body sheet metal. Closing the hood with an obstruction present could result in damage to the engine, sheet metal or the impacted objects.
WARNING The support rod must be insert- ed completely into the hole whenever you inspect the engine compartment. This will prevent the hood from falling and possibly injuring you.
WARNING — Unsecured engine hood
Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hood could fly open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 30
4 31
Features of your vehicle
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up the fuel filler lid opener. If the fuel filler lid does not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.
1. Stop the engine. 2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the
fuel filler lid opener up. 3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1) out to
fully open. 4. To remove the cap turn the fuel
filler cap (2) counterclockwise. 5. Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid 1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it clicks one time. This indi- cates that the cap is securely tight- ened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it lightly and make sure that it is securely closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
WARNING — Refueling Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until the condition stops before com- pletely removing the cap. If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and subject you to the risk of fire and burns.
OYB046025
OYB046026
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:36 PM Page 31
Features of your vehicle
324
NOTICE When refueling on unlevel ground, the fuel gauge may not point to the F position. It is not a malfunction. If you move your vehicle to a level ground, the fuel gauge will move to the full position.
NOTICE Tighten the cap until it clicks one time, otherwise the fuel cap open warning indicator light will illuminate.
Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an accident.
WARNING — Fire/ explosion risk
Read and follow all warnings posted at the gas station facili- ty. Failure to follow all warnings will result in severe personal injury, severe burns or death due to fire or explosion.
WARNING — Cell phone fires
Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cel- lular phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
WARNING — Portable fuel container
When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity dis- charge from the container can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, con- tact with the vehicle should be maintained until the filling is com- plete. Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline.
WARNING — Static electricity
Before touching the fuel noz- zle, you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity discharge by touch- ing another metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, noz- zle, or other gas source.
Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refuel- ing since you can generate static electricity by touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, satin, nylon, etc.) capable of produc- ing static electricity. Static electricity discharge can ignite fuel vapors resulting in rapid burning. If you must re- enter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate poten- tially dangerous static elec- tricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, noz- zle or other gasoline source.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 32
4 33
Features of your vehicle
Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to the Fuel requirements suggested in chapter 1. If the fuel filler cap requires replace- ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or the equivalent specified for your vehi- cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control sys- tem.
CAUTION — Exterior paint Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.
WARNING — Refueling& Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the engine off. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are securely closed, before starting the engine.
WARNING — Smoking DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refueling. Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in fire.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 33
Features of your vehicle
344
If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control lever located on the overhead console. The sunroof can only be opened, closed, or tilted when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to freez- ing conditions. After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it. The sunroof cannot slide when it is in the tilt position nor can it be tilted while in an open or slide position.
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
CAUTION — Sunroof control lever
Do not continue to press the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.
OYB046027
WARNING — Sunroof operation
When closing the sunroof, make sure there are no body parts in the movement range of the slid- ing roof. Parts of the body could become trapped or crushed.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the sun- roof, periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the guide rail.
WARNING Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or proper- ty damage.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 34
4 35
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof open warning (if equipped)
If the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door when the sunroof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for a few seconds and a warning image will appear on the LCD display. Close the sunroof securely when leaving your vehicle.
OSC047126N
CAUTION Make sure the sunroof is fully closed when leaving your vehi- cle. If the sunroof is opened, rain or snow may leak through the sunroof and wet the interior as well as allow theft to occur.
CAUTION Do not extend any luggage out- side the sunroof while driving.
WARNING In order to prevent accidental operation of the sunroof, espe- cially by a child, do not let a child operate the sunroof.
WARNING Do not sit on the top of the vehi- cle. It may cause vehicle dam- age.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 35
Features of your vehicle
364
Sliding the sunroof
To open the sunroof automatically:
Pull the sunroof control lever back- ward to the second detent position and then release it. The sunroof will slide all the way open. The sunroof will slide to the recom- mended open position (about 2 in. (5 cm) before the maximum slide open position. To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever briefly.
To open the sunroof to the maximum slide open position, press the switch towards the rear of the vehicle once again and hold it until the sunroof slide all the way open. To reduce wind noise while driving, we recommend you to drive at the recommended position (about 2 in (5 cm) before the maximum slide open position).
To close the sunroof automatically:
Push the sunroof control lever for- ward to the second detent position and then release it. The sunroof will automatically close all the way. To stop the sunroof sliding at any point, pull or push the sunroof control lever briefly. While driving with the sunroof in an open (or partially open position), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occurrence and can be reduced or eliminated by tak- ing the following actions. If you expe- rience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening.
OYB046028
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 36
4 37
Features of your vehicle
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is detected while the sunroof glass or sunshade is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction, and then stop. The auto reverse function does not work if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass or sunshade and the sunroof chassis. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
To tilt open the sunroof, push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof moves to the desired posi- tion. To close the sunroof, push the sun- roof lever forward or pull downward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.
OYB046029OYF049215
WARNING Make sure heads, other body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the window to avoid injuries or vehicle damage. Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm) in diameter caught between the sunroof glass and the front window channel may not be detected by the auto- matic reverse window and the window will not stop and reverse direction.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 37
Features of your vehicle
384
Sunshade
When opening the sunroof, the sun- shade will also open. Once the sun- roof is closed, the sunshade can be manually closed.
Resetting the sunroof Whenever the vehicle battery is dis- connected or discharged, or related fuse is blown, you must reset your sunroof system as follows:
1.The ignition switch must be in the ON position.
2.Close the sunroof completely. 3.Release the control lever. 4.Push the control lever forward until
the sunroof tilts and slightly moves up and down. Then, release lever.
5.Push the control lever forward until the sunroof is operated as follows:
TILT OPEN SLIDE OPEN SLIDE CLOSE
Then, release the control lever.
NOTICE Do not release the lever until the operation is completed. If you release the lever during oper- ation, try again from step 2.
OBK049019
CAUTION — Sunroof motor damage
If you try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the glass or the motor could be damaged.
WARNING — Sunroof Be careful that no head, hands
and body parts are obstructed by a closing sunroof.
Do not extend the face, neck, arms or body outside the sun- roof while driving.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 38
4 39
Features of your vehicle
For more detailed information, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
NOTICE If the sunroof is not reset when the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or related fuse is blown, the sunroof may operate improperly.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 39
Features of your vehicle
404
Electric power steering (EPS) Power steering uses the motor to assist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steer- ing system becomes inoperative, the vehicle may still be steered, but it will require increased steering effort. The electric power steering is con- trolled by the power steering control unit which senses the steering wheel torque and vehicle speed to com- mand the motor. The steering wheel becomes heavier as the vehicles speed increases and becomes lighter as the vehicles speed decreases for better control of the steering wheel. Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the power steering checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
NOTICE The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation: The steering effort is increased
immediately after turning the igni- tion switch on. This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics are completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition
A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the ignition switch is turned to the ON or LOCK position.
Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.
The steering effort increases if the steering wheel is rotated continu- ously when the vehicle is not in motion. However, after a few min- utes, it will return to its normal condition.
When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, noise may occur. If the temperature rises, the noise will likely disap- pear. This is a normal condition.
(Continued)
(Continued) When the charging system warn-
ing light comes on or the battery voltage is low (when the alternator or battery does not operate nor- mally), the steering wheel may get heavy and become difficult to con- trol operate abnormally.
If the Electric Power Steering System does not operate normally, the warn- ing light will illuminate on the instru- ment cluster.The steering wheel may require increased steering effort. Take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible.
STEERING WHEEL
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 40
4 41
Features of your vehicle
Tilt and telescopic steering (if equipped) Tilt steering allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi- tioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive, while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights and gauges. To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down the lock release lever (1), adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2) and height (3), then pull up the lock-release lever to lock (4) the steering wheel in place. Be sure to adjust the steering wheel to the desired position before driving.
NOTICE After adjustment, sometimes the lock release lever may not lock the steering wheel. It is not a malfunc- tion. This occurs when two gears are not engaged correctly. In this case, adjust the steering wheel again and then lock the steering wheel.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on your steering wheel. Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly. To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.
WARNING — Steering wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and height of the steering wheel while driving. You may lose steering control
OSC048027N
OYB046031
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 41
Features of your vehicle
424
Heated steering wheel (if equipped)
With the ignition switch in the ON position, pressing the heated steer- ing wheel button warms the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate. To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button once again. The indicator on the button will turn off. If you turn off the ignition while the steering wheel heater is ON, the heater will be OFF.
NOTICE The heated steering wheel will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering wheel is turned on.
CAUTION Do not install any grip to oper-
ate the steering wheel. This causes damage to the heated steering wheel system.
When cleaning the heated steering wheel, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may dam- age the surface of the steering wheel.
If the surface of the steering wheel is damaged by a sharp object, damage to the heated steering wheel components could occur.
OYB046030
WARNING If the steering wheel becomes too warm, turn the system off. The heated steering wheel may cause burns even at low tem- peratures, especially if used for long periods of time.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 42
4 43
Features of your vehicle
Inside rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror so that the center view through the rear window is seen. Make this adjustment before you start driving. Do not place objects in the rear seat which would interfere with your vision through the rear window.
Day/night rearview mirror
Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position (1). Pull the day/night lever toward you (2) to reduce the glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving. Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.
(1) : Day, (2) : Night
Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving. Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch (if equipped).The mirror heads can be folded to prevent damage dur- ing an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street. The right outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. Use your interior rearview mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.
MIRRORS
WARNING — Mirror adjustment
Do not adjust the rearview mirror while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control.
OUM046434L
WARNING Do not modify the inside mirror in any manner including installing a wider mirror. Doing so could result in injury during an accident or deployment of the air bag.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 43
Features of your vehicle
444
Remote control
Electric type
The electric remote control mirror switch allows you to adjust the posi- tion of the left and right outside rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi- tion of either mirror the ignition switch should be in the ACC or ON position. To adjust the position of either mirror, press the R or L button (1) to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point () on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.
After adjustment, press the R or L button again to prevent any inadver- tent adjustment.
CAUTION — Rearview mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the sur- face of the glass. If ice should restrict movement of the mirror, do not force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water.
WARNING — Mirror adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while the vehi- cle is moving. This could result in loss of control.
OSC046018
CAUTION When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. It may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
CAUTION — Outside mirror The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.
Do not attempt to adjust the outside rearview mirror by hand. Doing so may damage the parts.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 44
4 45
Features of your vehicle
Folding the outside rearview mirror
Electric type
To fold the outside rearview mirror, depress the button. To unfold it, depress the button again.
NOTICE — Electric type outside rearview
mirror The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the ignition switch is in the OFF posi- tion. However, to prevent unneces- sary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than nec- essary while the engine is not run- ning.
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.
OSC046019 CAUTION Do no fold an electric type out- side rearview mirror by hand. Doing so could cause motor failure.
OYB046034
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 45
Features of your vehicle
464
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display
OSC048547N/OSC048101N
Type A
The actual cluster and contents of the LCD display in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:37 PM Page 46
4 47
Features of your vehicle
Instrument Cluster Control Adjusting Instrument Cluster Illumination
The instrument panel illumination intensity can be adjusted by pressing the control switch with the headlight switch in any position when the igni- tion switch is in the ON position. The illumination intensity is shown on the instrument cluster LCD win- dow.
If you hold the illumination control button (+ or -), the brightness will be changed continuously.
If the brightness reaches to the maximum or minimum level, an alarm will sound.
LCD window Control
The LCD window modes can be changed by using the control buttons on the steering wheel.
[Type A] (1) TRIP : TRIP button for changing
trip modes (2) RESET : RESET button for reset-
ting items
OYB046035
OYB046121
OSC047127N
Type A
Type B
OYB046036
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:38 PM Page 47
Features of your vehicle
484
[Type B] (1) : MODE button for change the
LCD MODES (2) / : MOVE scroll switch for
select the items (3) OK : SET/RESET button for set
the items or reset the items
For the LCD modes, refer to LCD window in this chapter.
Gauges Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the for- ward speed of the vehicle. The speedometer is calibrated in miles per hour and/or kilometers per hour.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the approximate number of engine revo- lutions per minute (rpm). Use the tachometer to select the cor- rect shift points and to prevent lug- ging and/or over-revving the engine. The tachometer pointer may move slightly when the ignition switch is in ACC or ON position with the engine OFF. This movement is normal and will not affect the accuracy of the tachometer once the engine is run- ning.
OYB046105
OYB046106
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:38 PM Page 48
4 49
Features of your vehicle
Engine coolant temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature of the engine coolant when the igni- tion switch is ON. Do not continue driving with an over- heated engine. If your vehicle over- heats, refer to If the engine over- heats in chapter 7. If the gauge pointer moves beyond the normal range area toward the H position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approx- imate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel tank capacity is given in chapter 9. The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty. On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
CAUTION — Red zone Do not operate the engine with- in the tachometer’s RED ZONE. This may cause severe engine damage.
OSC047104N
OSC047105N
WARNING — Hot radiator Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pres- sure and could cause severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before adding coolant to the reservoir.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:38 PM Page 49
Features of your vehicle
504
NOTICE — Fuel gauge Running out of fuel can expose vehi- cle occupants to danger. You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the E (Empty) level.
NOTICE The fuel display may not be accu- rate if the vehicle is on an incline.
Odometer
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis- tance the vehicle has been driven. You will also find the odometer useful to determine when periodic mainte- nance should be performed. — Odometer range :
999,999 miles or 0 ~ 1,599,999 km.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out- side air temperatures by 1F (1C). — Temperature range : — Type A Cluster : -40F ~ 199F
(-40C ~ 85C) — Type B Cluster : — 40F ~ 211F
(- 40C ~ 85C)
CAUTION — Low fuel Avoid driving with extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
OSC047128N OSC047129N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:38 PM Page 50
4 51
Features of your vehicle
The outside temperature on the dis- play may not change immediately like a general thermometer to pre- vent the driver from being inattentive. To change the temperature unit (from C to F or from F to C)
Type A Cluster Press the TRIP button for 5 seconds and more.
Type B Cluster The temperature unit can be changed by using the User Settings mode of the LCD Windows.
For more details, refer to LCD Windows in this chapter.
Transmission Shift Indicator Automatic Transmission Shift Indicator
This indicator displays which Automatic Transmission shift lever is selected. Park : P Reverse : R Neutral : N Drive : D Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
OYB046125
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:38 PM Page 51
Features of your vehicle
524
Overview
LCD windows show the following var- ious information to drivers. — Trip information — LCD modes — Warning messages
Trip information (Trip computer) The trip computer is a microcomput- er-controlled driver information sys- tem that displays information related to driving.
NOTICE Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes — For Type A cluster
LCD WINDOWS (IF EQUIPPED)
OSC046119
To change the trip mode, press the TRIP button.
Tripmeter [A] Elapsed Time [A] Average Vehicle Speed [A]
TRIP A
Tripmeter [B] Elapsed Time [B] Average Vehicle Speed [B]
TRIP B
Distance To Empty Average Fuel Economy Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
Service reminder Service
Speed On/Off Speed
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:38 PM Page 52
4 53
Features of your vehicle
— For Type B cluster Fuel Economy
Distance To Empty (1)
The range is the estimated dis- tance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel.
— Distance range : 1~99,999 mi or 1~9,999 km.
If the estimated distance is below 1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will display — as distance to empty.
NOTICE If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been interrupted, the distance to empty function may not operate correct- ly.
The distance to empty may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.
The trip computer may not regis- ter additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
The fuel economy and distance to empty may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driv- ing habits, and condition of the vehicle.
Tripmeter Average Fuel Economy Timer
Accumulate Info
Tripmeter Average Fuel Economy Timer
Digital speedometer
Drive Info
Average Fuel Economy Instant Fuel Economy
TRIP
To change the trip mode, scroll the MOVE scroll switch ( / ) in the trip computer mode.
OSC047131N
OSC047132N
Type A
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:38 PM Page 53
Features of your vehicle
544
Average Fuel Economy (2)
The average fuel economy is cal- culated by the total driving dis- tance and fuel consumption since the last average fuel economy reset. — Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
L/100 km, km/L or MPG The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati- cally.
Manual reset To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the RESET (for Type A cluster), OK ( for Type B cluster) (reset) on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the aver- age fuel economy is displayed.
Automatic reset (for type B cluster) To make the average fuel economy be reset automatically whenever refu- eling, select the Fuel economy auto reset mode in User Setting menu of the LCD window (Refer to LCD win- dow). OFF — You may set to default manu-
ally by using the trip switch reset but- ton.
After ignition — The vehicle will auto- matically set to default once 4 hours pass after the Ignition is in OFF.
After refueling — After refueling more than 1.6 gallons (6 liters) and driving over 1 mph (1 km/h), the vehicle will reset to default automatically.
NOTICE The average fuel economy is not dis- played for more accurate calculation if the vehicle does not drive more than 10 seconds or 0.03 miles (50 meters) since the ignition switch is turned to ON.
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
This mode displays the instant fuel economy during the last few sec- onds when the vehicle speed is more than 6.2MPH(10km/h). — Fuel economy range:
30.0 L/100 km or 0.0 ~ 50.0 MPG
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:38 PM Page 54
4 55
Features of your vehicle
Trip A/B (for type A cluster)
Tripmeter (1)
The tripmeter is the total driving dis- tance since the last tripmeter reset. — Distance range: 0~999999 mi or
0~1599999 km To reset the tripmeter, press the
RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the tripmeter is displayed.
Elapsed Time (2)
The elapsed time is the total driv- ing time since the last elapsed time reset. — Time range (hh:mm) : 00:00 ~
99:59 To reset the elapsed time, press
the RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the elapsed time is dis- played.
NOTICE Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the elapsed time keeps going while the engine is running.
Average Vehicle Speed (3)
The average vehicle speed is cal- culated by the total driving dis- tance and driving time since the last average vehicle speed reset. — Speed range : 0 ~ 999 mph or
km/h To reset the average vehicle
speed, press the RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.
NOTICE The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less than 0.03 miles (50 meters) or the driving time is less than 10 seconds since the ignition switch is turned to ON.
Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the average vehicle speed keeps going while the engine is running.
OSC047137N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:38 PM Page 55
Features of your vehicle
564
Digital speedometer
This mode displays the current speed of the vehicle.
Accumulated driving information mode (for type B cluster)
Displays accumulated information starting from mileage/fuel efficien- cy/time default point. Accumulated information is calcu-
lated after the vehicle has run for more than 0.2 miles (300 meters).
If you press OK button for more than 1 second after the Cumulative Information is displayed, the infor- mation will be reset.
If the engine is running, even when the vehicle is not in motion, the information will be accumulated.
One time driving information mode (for type B cluster)
The vehicle will display Driving Information once per one ignition cycle. — Fuel efficiency is calculated after the
vehicle has run for more than 0.2 miles (300 meters).
— The Driving Information will be reset 4 hours after ignition has been turned off. So, when the vehicle ignition is turned on within 4 hours, the informa- tion will not be reset.
— If you press OK button for more than 1 second after the Driving Information is displayed, the informa- tion will be reset.
OSC047135N
OSC047136N
Type A
Type B
OSC047133N OSC047134N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:38 PM Page 56
4 57
Features of your vehicle
— If the engine is running, even when the vehicle is not in motion, the infor- mation will be accumulated.
LCD Modes (for type B cluster)
(1) Trip Computer mode This mode displays driving informa- tion like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on.
For more details, refer to Trip Computer in this chapter.
(2) User Setting mode On this mode, you can change set- tings of the doors, lamps and so on.
(3) Master warning mode This mode informs of warning mes- sages related to TPMS fail, low pres- sure (if equipped) or Low engine oil (if equipped).
For controlling the LCD modes, refer to LCD window Control in this chapter.
OSC046119
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 57
Features of your vehicle
584
Service Mode Service in It calculates and displays when you need a scheduled maintenance service (mileage or days). If the remaining mileage or time reaches 900 mi. (1,500 km) or 30 days, Service in message is dis- played for several seconds each time you set the ignition switch to the ON position.
Service required If you do not have your vehicle serv- iced according to the already inputted service interval, Service required message is displayed for several sec- onds each time you set the ignition switch to the ON position. To reset the service interval to the mileage and days you inputted before: Press the RESET button for more
than 1 second. (for Type A cluster) Press the OK button (Reset) for
more than 1 second. (for Type B cluster)
NOTICE If any of the following conditions occurs, the mileage and days may be incorrect. — The battery cable is disconnected. — The fuse switch is turned off. — The battery is discharged.
User Settings Mode (for type B cluster) On this mode, you can change set- ting of the doors, lamps, and so on.
WARNING Do not adjust the User Setting while driving.You may lose your steering control which could cause an accident and severe bodily injury.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 58
4 59
Features of your vehicle
Edit settings after shifting to P/Edit set- tings after engaging parking brake This warning message appears if you try to adjust the User Settings while driving. — Automatic Transmission For your safety, change the User Settings after parking the vehicle, applying the parking brake and mov- ing the shift lever to P (Park).
Driver Assistance (if equipped) Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) (if equipped) : To activate or deactivate the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system.
For more details, refer to Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA) in chapter 6.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) (if equipped) : Choose the sensitivity of the Forward Collision Warning (FCW).
For more details, refer to Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA) in chapter 6.
Door Automatically Lock — Enable on Speed : All doors will be
automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph (15km/h).
— Enable on Shift : All doors will be automatically locked if the Automatic Transmission shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 59
Features of your vehicle
604
Automatically Unlock — Disable : The auto door unlock
operation will be canceled. — Vehicle Off/On, Key out : All doors
will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from the ignition switch is set to the LOCK position.
— On Shift to P : All doors will be automatically unlocked if the Automatic Transmission shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.
Two Press Unlock (if equipped) — Off : The two press unlock function
will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the unlock but- ton on the driver’s door is pressed.
— On : The driver’s door will unlock if the unlock button on the driver’s door is pressed. When the same button is pressed again within 4 seconds, all doors will unlock.
Horn Feedback (if equipped) : If this item is checked, the door lock sound function will be activated when locking doors.
Lights One Touch Turn Signal — Off : The one touch turn signal
function will be deactivated. — 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The lane change
signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.
For more details, refer to Light in this chapter
Head Lamp Delay — If this item is checked, the head
lamp delay function will be activat- ed.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 60
4 61
Features of your vehicle
Convenience Wiper/Light Display (if equipped)
: If this item is checked, the Wiper/Light Display will be activat- ed.
Auto rear wiper (reverse) (If equipped) : If this item is checked, the rear wiper will automatically activated when the front wiper is in ON position and shift lever is in R (reverse) position.
Gear Position Pop-up (if equipped) : If this item is checked, the gear position pop-up display will be activated.
Icy road warning (if equipped) : If this item is checked, the Icy road warning display will be activated.
Service interval Service Interval
To activate or deactivate the serv- ice interval function.
Adjust Interval To adjust the interval to mileage or period.
Reset To reset the service interval func- tion.
Other Features Fuel Economy Auto Reset — Off : The average fuel economy will
not reset automatically whenever refueling.
— After Ignition : The average fuel economy will reset automatically whenever it has passed 4 hours after turning OFF the engine.
— After Refueling : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
Fuel Economy Unit To select the fuel economy unit. (UK gallon US gallon)
Temperature Unit To select the temperature unit. (C,F)
Tire Pressure Unit (if equipped) : Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, bar)
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 61
Features of your vehicle
624
Language Choose the language
Reset You can reset the menus in the User Settings Mode. All menus in the User Settings Mode are initialized, except language and service interval.
Warning messages Warning messages appear on the LCD to warn the driver. It is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The warning message may appear differently depending on the type of instrument cluster and some may not show the warning message at all. The warning message is shown in either symbol, symbol and text, or text type only. You can choose the preferred language (for Type B only) by selecting the User setting menu in LCD mode.
Door, hood, trunk (tailgate) open This warning is displayed indicat-
ing which door, or the hood, or the trunk (tailgate) is open.
OYB046133
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 62
4 63
Features of your vehicle
Sunroof Open (if equipped) This warning is displayed if you
turn off the engine when the sun- roof is open.
Engine has overheated This warning message illuminates when the engine coolant tempera- ture is above 248F (120C). This means that the engine is overheated and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer to Overheating in chapter 7.
Icy Road Warning Light (if equipped)
This warning light is to warn the driv- er the road may be icy. When the following conditions occur, the warning light (including Outside Temperature Gauge) blinks 5 times and then illuminates, and also warn- ing chime sounds once. — The temperature on the Outside
Temperature Gauge is below approximately 40F (4C).
OYB046134
OYB046136
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 63
Features of your vehicle
644
NOTICE If the icy road warning light appears while driving, you should drive more attentively and refrain from speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 64
4 65
Features of your vehicle
Warning lights
NOTICE — Warning lights Make sure that all warning lights are OFF after starting the engine. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with
the SRS. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the Seat Belts in chapter 3.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 65
Features of your vehicle
664
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds — It remains on if the parking brake
is applied. When the parking brake is applied. When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low. — If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2.With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more details, refer to «Brake Fluid» in chapter 8). Then check all brake components for fluid leaks. If any leak on the brake system is still found, the warning light remains on, or the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle. In this case, have your vehicle towed to an authorized Kia dealer and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual- diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual sys- tems should fail. With only one of the dual systems working, greater pedal pressure will be required to stop the vehicle. Also, the vehicle will require increased stopping distance with only a portion of the brake system working. If the brakes fail while you are driv- ing, shift to a lower gear for addition- al engine braking and stop the vehi- cle as soon as it is safe to do so. Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low. In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 66
4 67
Features of your vehicle
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys- tem will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system). In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Electronic Brake force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light These two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving:
When the ABS and regular brake system may not work normally. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING — ABS/Brake Light
When both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking thereby increas- ing the risk of a crash or injury. In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 6:06 PM Page 67
Features of your vehicle
684
NOTICE — Electronic Brake force Distribution (EBD) System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or trip- meter may not work. Also, the EPS Warning Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease. In this case, have your vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
Electronic Power Steering (EPS) Warning Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It remains on until the engine is
started. When there is a malfunction with
the EPS. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It remains on until the engine is
started. When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 68
4 69
Features of your vehicle
Charging System Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It remains on until the engine is
started. When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging system:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off and check the alternator drive belt for looseness or breakage. If the belt is adjusted properly, there may be a problem in the electrical charging system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It remains on until the engine is
started. When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the engine oil level (For more details, refer to Engine Oil in section 8). If the level is low, add oil as required. If the warning light remains on after adding oil or if oil is not available, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION — Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause damage to the emission control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel economy.
CAUTION If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten- tial catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 69
Features of your vehicle
704
If the warning light stays on while the engine is running, there may be seri- ous engine damage. In this case, 1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so. 2. Turn off the engine and check the
oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the warn- ing light stays on after the engine is started, turn the engine off immediately. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.CAUTION — Engine damage
If the engine is not stopped immediately after the engine oil pressure warning light is illumi- nated and stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may result.
CAUTION — Engine Overheating
Do not continue driving with the engine overheated. Otherwise the engine may be damaged.
CAUTION — Low Fuel Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level warning light on or with the fuel level below E can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter (if equipped).
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 70
4 71
Features of your vehicle
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
For more details, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in chapter 7.
This warning light remains on after blinking for approximately 60 seconds or repeats blinking on and off at the intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
When there is a malfunction with the TPMS. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) in chapter 7.
The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors. If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.
WARNING — Low tire pressure
Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.
Continued driving or low pres- sure tires will cause the tires to overheat and fail.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 71
Features of your vehicle
724
Door Ajar Warning Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Trunk (tailgate) Open Warning Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When the trunk (tailgate) is not closed securely.
Washer Fluid Warning Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
When the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty. In this case, you should refill the washer fluid.
Master Warning Mode (if equipped)
This warning light informs the driv- er of the following situations: — Forward Collision-Avoidance
Assist (FCA) malfunction (if equipped)
— Forward Collision Warning (FCW) malfunction (if equipped)
— Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) radar blind (if equipped)
If the warning situation is solved, the master warning light will turn off.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 72
4 73
Features of your vehicle
LED Headlamp Warning Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with
the LED headlamp. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
This warning light blinks:
When there is a malfunction with a LED headlamp related part.
In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
NOTICE Continuous driving with the LED Headlamp Warning Light on or blinking can reduce LED headlamp (low beam) life.
Indicator Lights Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light This indicator light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in chapter 6.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light This indicator light illuminates:
Once you set the ignition switch to the ON position. — It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off. When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but- ton.
For more details, refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in chapter 6.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 73
Features of your vehicle
744
Immobilizer Indicator Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the vehicle detects the immobilizer in your key properly while the ignition switch is ON. — At this time, you can start the
engine. — The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks:
When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator Light
This indicator light blinks:
When you turn the turn signal light on.
If any of the following occurs, there may be a malfunction with the turn signal system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
— The indicator light does not blink but illuminates.
— The indicator light blinks more rapidly.
— The indicator light does not illumi- nate at all.
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When the headlights are on and in the high beam position
When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
When the tail lights or headlights are on.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 74
4 75
Features of your vehicle
Cruise Indicator Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control system is enabled.
For more details, refer to Cruise Control System in chapter 6.
Cruise SET Indicator Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to Cruise Control System in chapter 6.
SPORT Mode Indicator Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
When you select SPORT mode as drive mode.
For more details, refer to Sport Mode in chapter 6.
SET
CRUISE
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 75
Features of your vehicle
764
Rear view monitor The rear view monitor will activate with the ignition switch on and the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. Please note that during initial start up, the rear view monitor may not display instantly due to the audio system booting up. Approximately two to four seconds may be required before displaying during initial reverse selection. This occurs when starting and immediate- ly shifting to reverse. This system is a supplemental sys- tem that shows behind the vehicle through the UVO audio or navigation display backing-up. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the inside/outside rearview mirrors and the area behind the vehicle before and while backing up. Always keep the camera lens clean. If lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not operate normally. The rear view monitor is not a substi- tute for proper and safe backing-up procedures. Always drive safely and use caution when backing up.
The rear view monitor may not dis- play every object behind the vehicle.
REAR VIEW MONITOR
WARNING — Backing Up & Using Camera
Never rely solely on the rear view monitor when backing up. Prior to entering your vehicle always do a visual check of the area behind your vehicle, and before backing up be aware of your sur- roundings and supplement the rear view monitor by looking over your shoulders and check- ing your rear view mirrors. Due to the difficulty of ensuring that the area behind you remains clear, always back up slowly and stop immediately if you even suspect that a person, and espe- cially a child, might be behind you.
Type B
Type A
OSC047438N
OYB046401
OYB046402
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 76
4 77
Features of your vehicle
Battery saver function The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis- charged. The system automatically turns off the parking lights when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door.
With this feature, the parking lights will turn off automatically if the driv- er parks on the side of the road at night. If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, perform the following: 1) Open the driver-side door. 2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch on the steering column.
Headlight escort function (if equipped) The headlights (and/or taillights) will remain on for approximately 5 min- utes after the ignition key is removed or turned to the ACC or LOCK posi- tion. However, if the drivers door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 15 seconds. The headlights can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the trans- mitter twice or turning off the light switch from the headlight or Auto light position. If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except driver’s door), the battery saver function does not operate and the headlight escort function does not turn off automatically. Therefore, It causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle. If the headlights are not working properly have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. Don’t attempt to inspect or replace the wiring yourself to prevent mal- function.
Headlight welcome function (if equipped) When the headlight switch is in the ON or AUTO position and all doors (and tailgate) are closed and locked, if you press the door unlock button on the transmitter, the headlights will come on for about 15 seconds. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the function can only oper- ate at night. At this time, if you press the door unlock button again or door lock but- ton on the transmitter, the headlights will turn off immediately.
LIGHTING
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 77
Features of your vehicle
784
Daytime running light (if equipped) The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many dif- ferent driving conditions, and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset. The DRL system turns OFF when: 1. The headlight switch is ON. 2. The engine is OFF. 3. Engaging the Parking Brake
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position. To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:
(1) OFF position (2) Auto light position (if equipped) (3) Parking light position (4) Headlight position
OSC047414N
OSC046400
Type A
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 78
4 79
Features of your vehicle
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the park- ing light position (3rd position), the tail, position, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head- light position (4th position) the head, tail, position, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON. The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the headlights.
Auto light position (if equipped)
When the light switch is in the AUTO light position, the taillights and head- lights will turn ON or OFF automati- cally depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.
OSC047415N
OSC047401N
Type A
Type B
OSC047416N
OSC047402N
Type A
Type B
OSC047417N
OSC047403N
Type A
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 79
Features of your vehicle
804
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights, push the lever away from you. Pull it back for normal (low beam) position. The high-beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running.
CAUTION Never place anything over the sensor (1) located on the instru- ment panel.This will ensure bet- ter auto-light system control. Do not clean the sensor using a window cleaner, the cleaner may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation. If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coat- ing on the front windshield, the Auto light system may not work properly.
WARNING — High beams Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver’s vision.
OSC047418N
OSC047404N
Type A
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:39 PM Page 80
4 81
Features of your vehicle
To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return to the normal (low-beam) position when released. The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature.
Turn signals and lane change signals
The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function. To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down (A). The green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indicator continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the OFF position. To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in position (B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released. If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.
OSC047419N
OSC047405N
Type A
Type B
OSC047420N
OSC047406N
Type A
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 81
Features of your vehicle
824
One-touch lane change function To activate a one-touch lane change function, move the turn signal lever slightly and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 times. You can choose one-touch lane change blinking function in One touch turn signal of User setting. Refer to User setting in chapter 4. (if equipped)
NOTICE If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, the bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connection in the circuit.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 82
4 83
Features of your vehicle
A : Wiper speed control (front) HI High wiper speed LO Low wiper speed INT Intermittent wipe AUTO* Automatic control wipe OFF Off MIST Single wipe
B : Intermittent control wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
D : Rear wiper/washer control /ON Continuous wipe O/OFF Off HI High wiper speed LO Low wiper speed
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
* : if equipped
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OSC047428N/OSC047422N/OSC047427N/OSC047446N
Front Rear (5 Door, if equipped) Type A
Type B
Type A
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 83
Features of your vehicle
844
Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the igni- tion switch is turned ON. MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and release it. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in a light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob.
LO : Normal wiper speed HI : Fast wiper speed
NOTICE If there is a heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the wind- shield wipers to ensure proper oper- ation. If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and washer system.
AUTO (Automatic) control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper end of the windshield glass senses the amount of rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for the proper interval. The more it rains, the faster the wiper operates. When the rain stops, the wiper stops.
OSC047411N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 84
4 85
Features of your vehicle
To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1). If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode when the ignition switch is ON, the wiper will operate once to per- form a self-check of the system. Set the wiper to off position when the wiper is not in use.
Windshield washers (front)
In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles. Use this function when the wind- shield is dirty.
CAUTION When washing the vehicle, set the wiper switch in the off posi- tion to stop the auto wiper oper- ation. The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO mode while washing the vehicle. Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the passenger side windshield glass. Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warran- ty. When starting the vehicle in winter, set the wiper switch in the off position. Otherwise, wipers may operate and ice may damage the windshield wiper blades. Always remove all snow and ice and defrost the wind- shield properly prior to operat- ing the windshield wipers.
OSC047424N
OSC047429N
Type A
Type B
CAUTION When the ignition switch is ON and the windshield wiper switch is placed in the AUTO mode, use caution in the following situa- tions to avoid any injury to the hands or other parts of the body: Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing the rain sensor.
Do not wipe the upper end of the windshield glass with a damp or wet cloth.
Do not put pressure on the windshield glass.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 85
Features of your vehicle
864
The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not sufficient, you add appropriate non-abrasive wind- shield washer fluid to the washer reservoir. The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side.
CAUTION — Wiper position When washing the vehicle, set the wiper switch in the off posi- tion to stop the auto wiper oper- ation. The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO mode while washing the vehicle.
CAUTION — Wipers & windshields
To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.
To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other compo- nents, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.
WARNING — Obscured visibility
Do not use the washer in freez- ing temperatures without first warming the windshield with the defrosters; the washer solu- tion could freeze on the wind- shield and obscure your vision.
CAUTION — Washer pump To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not oper- ate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 86
4 87
Features of your vehicle
Rear window wiper and wash- er switch (for 5 door)
The rear window wiper and washer switch is located at the end of the wiper and washer switch lever. Turn the switch to operate the rear wiper and washer.
ON — Normal wiper operation (1) HI — High wiper speed (2) LO — Low wiper speed (3) OFF — Wiper is not in operation
Push the lever away from you or turn the wiper lever switch upwards fully to spray rear washer fluid and to run the rear wipers 1~3 cycle. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever.
OSC047426N
OSC047431N
Type A
Type B
OSC047425N
OSC047430N
Type A
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 87
Features of your vehicle
884
Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the engine is not running. It may cause battery discharge.
Automatic turn off function (if equipped) The interior lights automatically turn off approximately 20 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. If your vehicle is equipped with the theft alarm system, the interior lights automatically turn off approximately 5 seconds after the system is in armed stage.
Map lamp (if equipped)
Push the lens (1) to turn the map lamp on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and front passenger.
INTERIOR LIGHT
WARNING — Interior light Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark. The glare from the interior lights may obstruct your view and cause an accident.
OYB046456
OYB046403
Type A
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 88
4 89
Features of your vehicle
DOOR (2) : In the DOOR position, the map lamp and the room lamp come on when any door is opened regard- less of the ignition switch position. When doors are unlocked by the transmitter, the map lamp and the room lamp come on for approxi- mately 30 seconds as long as any door is not open. The map lamp and the room lamp turn off gradually after approxi- mately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked, the map lamp and the room lamp will turn off immediately. If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the map lamp and the room lamp stays on for about 20 minutes. However, if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position, the map lamp and the room lamp stays on continuously. If the type B room lamp switch is OFF, it doesn’t work.
ON (3) : The map lamp and the room lamp stay on at all times.
OFF (4) : The lights turn off even if a door is opened.
NOTICE When the lamp is turned ON by pressing the lens (1), the lamp does not turn off even if the switch (2) is in the OFF position.
Room lamp
To turn the room lamp ON or OFF, push the switch. If your vehicle is not equipped with a map lamp, the room lamp will also turn on or off as follows.
OYB046404
OSC047432N
Type A
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 89
Features of your vehicle
904
— The room lamp comes on when a door is opened. The lamps go out after approximately 30 seconds.
— The room lamp comes on for approximately 30 seconds when doors are unlocked with a trans- mitter as long as the doors are not opened.
— The room lamp will stay on for approximately 20 minutes if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK/OFF position.
— The room lamp will stay on con- tinuously if the door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position.
— The room lamp will go out imme- diately if the ignition switch is changed to the ON position or all doors are locked.
DOOR (2) : In the DOOR position, the map lamp and the room lamp come on when any door is opened regard- less of the ignition switch position. When doors are unlocked by the transmitter, the map lamp and the room lamp come on for approxi- mately 30 seconds as long as any door is not open. The map lamp and the room lamp turn off gradually after approxi- mately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the ignition switch is ON or all doors are locked, the map lamp and the room lamp will turn off immediately. If a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK position, the map lamp and the room lamp stays on for about 20 minutes. However, if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position, the map lamp and the room lamp stays on continuously. If the type B room lamp switch is OFF, it doesn’t work.
ON (3) : The map lamp and the room lamp stay on at all times.
OFF (4) : The lights turn off even if a door is opened.
NOTICE When the lamp is turned ON by pressing the lens (1), the lamp does not turn off even if the switch (2) is in the OFF position.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 90
4 91
Features of your vehicle
Luggage room lamp
The luggage room lamp comes on when the trunk (tailgate) is opened.
The luggage lamp comes on as long as the trunk lid (tailgate) is open. To prevent unnecessary charging sys- tem drain, close the trunk lid (tail- gate) securely after using the lug- gage room.
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when the glove box is opened. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the glove box securely after use.
OYB046407
OSC047412N
OYB046405
4 Door
5 Door
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 91
Features of your vehicle
924
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
Push the switch to turn the light on or off. : The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed. : The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
OYB046406
CAUTION Always have the switch in the off position when the vanity mir- ror lamp is not in use. If the sun- visor is closed without turning the lamp off, it may discharge the battery or damage the sunvi- sor.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 92
4 93
Features of your vehicle
If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to Windshield Defrosting and Defogging in this section.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the rear window, while the engine is running. To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illu- minates when the defroster is on. If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster. The rear window defroster automati- cally turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the defroster manually, press the rear window defroster button again.
Outside mirror defroster (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the outside rearview mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.
DEFROSTER
OYB046324
CAUTION — Conductors To prevent damage to the con- ductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:40 PM Page 93
Features of your vehicle
944
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Mode selection knob
3. Temperature control knob
4. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Air intake control button
OSC047300N/OSC047301N
Type A
Type B
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:41 PM Page 94
4 95
Features of your vehicle
Heating and air conditioning 1. Start the engine. 2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion. To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling : — Heating: — Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air or recirculated air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.
OYB046302
(if equipped)(if equipped)
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:41 PM Page 95
Features of your vehicle
964
Mode selection
The mode selection knob controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system. Air can be directed to the floor, dash- board outlets, or windshield. Six symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E)
Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-Level (A, D)
Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.
OYB046303
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:41 PM Page 96
4 97
Features of your vehicle
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped)
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside of the vehicle faster. Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. In this mode, the air conditioning and the recirculated air position will be selected automatically.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumb- wheel. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation sys- tem.To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right for warm air or left for cooler air.
OSC047311N OYB046305
OYB046304
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:41 PM Page 97
Features of your vehicle
984
Air intake control
This is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position. To change the air intake control posi- tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heat- ing system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
If the recirculated air position is not selected or turned off, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fog- ging of the windshield and side win- dows and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale. In addition, prolonged operation of the air conditioning with the recircu- lated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passen- ger compartment.
OSC047312N WARNING — Reduced Visibility
Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculat- ed air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 98
4 99
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for fan operation. The fan speed control knob allows you to control the fan speed of the air flowing from the ventilation system. To change the fan speed, turn the knob to the right for higher speed or left for lower speed.
To turn off the blowers
To turn off the blowers, turn the fan speed control knob to the 0 position.
WARNING — Recirculated Air
Continue using the climate con- trol system in the recirculated air position can cause drowsi- ness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.
WARNING — Sleeping with A/C on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating on as this may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.
OSC047313N OSC047314N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 99
Features of your vehicle
1004
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.
System operation Ventilation 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.
If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the , position.
Operation Tips
To prevent dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake con- trol to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the dust or fumes has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.
Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
To prevent interior fog on the wind- shield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.
OYB046309
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 100
4 101
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-1234yf refrigerant. 1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button. 2. Set the mode to the position. 3. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However, prolonged operation in the recircu- lated air position will excessively dry the air. In this case, change the air position.
4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.
The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to insure proper and safe operation.
The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place.
The air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators should be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
NOTICE When opening the windows in humid weather, air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equip- ment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.
CAUTION — Excessive A/C While using the air conditioning system, monitor the tempera- ture gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning system opera- tion may cause engine over- heating and potential engine damage. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air con- ditioning system off if the tem- perature gauge indicates engine overheating.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 101
Features of your vehicle
1024
Air conditioning system operation tips
If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.
During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning com- pressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system per- formance.
When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal sys- tem operation characteristic.
Operating the air conditioning sys- tem in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, how- ever, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.
During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
Climate control air filter
The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the vehicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may decrease, resulting in moisture accumulation on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air position is selected. If this happens, have the cli- mate control air filter replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
OMG075033
Outside air
Recirculated air
Climate control air filter
Blower
Evaporator core
Heater core
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 102
4 103
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent cli- mate control air filter inspections and changes are required.
When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized Kia dealer.
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air con- ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative influence on the air conditioning system. Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrig- erant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle may occur. To prevent damage, the air con- ditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.
WARNING The oil and refrigerant in your vehicles air conditioning sys- tem is under very high pressure. If proper service procedures are not followed an explosion may result. To reduce the risk of seri- ous injury or death, the air con- ditioning system in your vehicle should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.
WARNING — Vehicles equipped with R-1234yf
Because the refriger- ant is mildly inflam- mable and at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serv- iced by trained and certified technicians.
It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 103
Features of your vehicle
1044
Air Conditioning refrigerant label
The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant 2. Amount of refrigerant 3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 9 for more detail loca- tion of air conditioning refrigerant label.
OUM066035L
Example
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 104
4 105
Features of your vehicle
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OYB046300
1. Temperature control knob
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. Climate control display
4. Fan speed control knob
5. OFF button
6. Front windshield defroster button
7. Rear window defroster button
8. Mode selection button
9. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
10. Air intake control button
CAUTION Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion could cause the battery to discharge. It is best to operate the blower when the engine is run- ning.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 105
Features of your vehicle
1064
Automatic heating and air con- ditioning
1. Push the AUTO button.The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-con- ditioning will be controlled automat- ically by temperature setting.
2. Turn the temperature control knob to set the desired temperature.
NOTICE To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of the following: — Mode selection button — Air conditioning button — Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time to deselect the front windshield defroster function. The ‘AUTO’ sign will illuminate on the infor- mation display once again.)
— Air intake control button — Fan speed control knob The selected function will be con- trolled manually while other func- tions operate automatically.
For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 73F (23C).
OYB046313
OYB046314
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 106
4 107
Features of your vehicle
NOTICE Never place anything over the sen- sor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heat- ing and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi- tioning The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button. In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected. 1. Start the engine. 2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling : — Heating: — Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air or recirculated air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system. Every time you press the mode selection button, the mode will change as follows:
Refer to the illustration in the Manual climate control system.
OYB046437
OYB046320
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 107
Features of your vehicle
1084
Face-Level (B, D)
Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E)
Air flow is discharged towards the face and floor.
Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defroster.
Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.
Defrost-level
Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.
OYB046321
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 108
4 109
Features of your vehicle
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumb- wheel. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature control knob allows you to control the temperature of the air flowing from the ventilation sys- tem.To change the air temperature in the passenger compartment, turn the knob to the right for warm air or left for cooler air.
Air intake control
The air intake control is used to select outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position. To change the air intake control posi- tion, push the control button.
OYB046304
OYB046322OYB046314
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 109
Features of your vehicle
1104
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heat- ing system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
If the recirculated air position is not selected or turned off, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fog- ging of the windshield and side win- dows and the air within the passenger compartment may become stale. In addition, prolonged operation of the air conditioning with the recircu- lated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passen- ger compartment.
WARNING — Reduced Visibility
Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculat- ed air position may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.
WARNING — Sleeping with A/C on
Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on as this may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.
WARNING — Recirculated air
Continued use of the climate control system in the recirculat- ed air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle control. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:42 PM Page 110
4 111
Features of your vehicle
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by operating the fan speed control knob. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off.
OFF mode
Press the OFF button to turn off the air climate control system. However you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the igni- tion switch is in the ON position.
OYB046323OYB046316OYB046315
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 111
Features of your vehicle
1124
System operation Ventilation 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on.
If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position.
Operation Tips
To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the dust or fumes has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driv- er alert and comfortable.
Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions.
To prevent interior fog on the wind- shield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.
Air conditioning Kia Air Conditioning Systems are filled with R-1234yf refrigerant. 1. Start the engine. Press the air con-
ditioning button. 2. Set the mode to the position. 3. Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position. 4. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.
The refrigerant system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to insure proper and safe operation.
The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place.
The air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators should be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 112
4 113
Features of your vehicle
Air conditioning system operation tips
If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.
To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system.
During air conditioning system operation, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning com- pressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system per- formance.
When using the air conditioning system, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal sys- tem operation characteristic.
Operating the air conditioning sys- tem in the recirculated air position provides maximum cooling, how- ever, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to become stale.
During cooling operation, you may occasionally notice a misty air flow because of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system operation characteristic.
If you operate air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control to the lower speed.
CAUTION When using the air condition-
ing system, monitor the tem- perature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traf- fic when outside temperatures are high. Air conditioning sys- tem operation may cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indi- cates engine overheating.
When opening the windows in humid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since exces- sive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equip- ment, air conditioning should only be used with the windows closed.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 113
Features of your vehicle
1144
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.
If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.
Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear win- dow, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows.
Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster effi- ciency and to reduce the probabili- ty of fogging up the inside of the windshield.
Manual climate control system To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed except «0» position.
2. Select desired temperature. 3. Select the or position. 4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically. If the outside (fresh) air position is not selected automatically, press the corresponding button manually.
WARNING — Windshield heating
Do not use the ( ) or ( ) position during cooling opera- tion in extremely humid weath- er. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and the windshield could cause the outer surface of the wind- shield to fog up, causing loss of visibility.
OSC047315N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 114
4 115
Features of your vehicle
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest (extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot position.
3. Select the position. 4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically.
Automatic climate control system To defog inside windshield
1. Select desired fan speed. 2. Select desired temperature. 3. Press the defroster button ( ). 4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically. If the outside (fresh) air position is not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button ( ). 4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically. If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.
OSC047316N
OYB046319
OYB046318
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 115
Features of your vehicle
1164
Defogging Logic To reduce the probability of fogging up inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are con- trolled automatically according to certain conditions such as or position. Logic can be disabled and enabled by doing following :
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to the defrost position ( ).
3. Select any fan speed except 0 position.
4. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control button ( ) at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator light in the air intake control button will blink 3 times with 0.5 second of interval. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.
OSC047317N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 116
4 117
Features of your vehicle
Automatic climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Select the defroster position before pressing the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control button ( ) at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of interval. It indicates that the defog- ging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.
Auto defogging system (if equipped)
Auto defogging reduces the possibil- ity of fogging up the inside of the windshield by automatically sensing the moisture inside the windshield and air flow toward the windshield can increase. The auto defogging system operates when the AUTO mode is on.
OSC047433N
OYB046317
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 117
Features of your vehicle
1184
This indicator illuminates when the auto defogging system senses the mois- ture of inside the wind- shield and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, the auto defogging system addresses excess moisture on the inside of the windshield in stages as follows:
Step 1 : Operating the air condition- ing
Step 2 : Outside air position Step 3 : Blowing air flow toward the
windshield Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
If your vehicle is equipped with the auto defogging system, it is automat- ically activated when the conditions are met. However, if you would like to deacti- vate the auto defogging system, keep the front defroster button pressed longer than 3 seconds.
The ADS OFF symbol will be shown in the climate display to inform you that the system is deacti- vated. To re-activate the auto defogging system again, follow the procedure mentioned above and the ADS OFF symbol will disappear. If the battery has been disconnected or discharged, it resets to the auto defogging status.
NOTICE When the air conditioning is
turned on by Auto defogging sys- tem, if you try to turn off the air conditioning, the indicator will blink 3 times and the air condi- tioning will not be turned off.
For efficiency, do not select recir- culated air position while Auto defogging system is operating.
CAUTION Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the driver side windshield glass. Damage to the system parts could occur and may not be cov- ered by your vehicle warranty.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 118
4 119
Features of your vehicle
These compartments can be used to store small items. To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment. Always keep the storage compart- ment covers closed while driving.
Center console storage (if equipped)
To open the center console storage, pull up the lever.
Glove box
To open the glove box, pull the handle and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after use. Always keep the glove box closed while the vehicle is in motion.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING — Flammable materials
Do not store flammable/explo- sive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.
WARNING — Glove box To reduce the risk of injury in an accident or sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driving.
OYB046440
OYB046439
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 119
Features of your vehicle
1204
Sunglass holder (if equipped)
To open the sunglass holder, press the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses with the lenses facing out. To close the sun- glass holder, push it up.
Luggage net holder (if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the cargo area, you can use the 4 hold- ers located in the cargo area to attach the luggage net. If necessary, we recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer.
OYB046458
OUB041147
WARNING Do not open the sunglass hold- er while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehi- cle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.
WARNING — Sunglass holder
Do not keep objects except sun- glasses inside the sunglass holder. Heavier objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 120
4 121
Features of your vehicle
CAUTION To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.
WARNING To avoid bodily injury, DO NOT overstretch the luggage net and ALWAYS keep your face and body out of the luggage net’s recoil path. DO NOT use when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 121
Features of your vehicle
1224
Cup holder
NOTICE When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high tem- perature. This may damage the cup holder.
Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows. To use the sunvisor, pull it downward. To use the sunvisor for the side win- dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2). Adjust the sunvisor extension for- ward or backward (3). To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and slide the mirror cover (4). The ticket holder (5) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket (if equipped).
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING — Hot liquids Do not place uncovered cups of hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liquid spills, you may burn yourself. Such a burn to the driver could lead to loss of control of the vehicle.
OYB046446
OSC047434NCAUTION Keep your drinks sealed while driving to prevent spilling your drink. If liquid spills, it may get into the vehicle’s electrical/elec- tronic system and damage elec- trical/electronic parts.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 122
4 123
Features of your vehicle
Seat warmer (if equipped)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. With the ignition switch in the ON position, push either of the switches to warm the driver’s seat or the front passenger’s seat. During mild weather or under condi- tions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.
Each time you push the button, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :
The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on.
NOTICE With the seat warmer switch in the ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatical- ly depending on the seat tempera- ture.
CAUTION — Vanity mirror lamp
Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvi- sor to its original position after use. If the vanity mirror is not closed securely, the lamp will stay on and could result in bat- tery discharge and possible sunvisor damage.
OFFHIGH( )MIDDLE( )LOW( )
OSC047441N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 123
Features of your vehicle
1244
Power outlet (if equipped)
The power outlet is designed to pro- vide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 12V, 15A with the engine running. Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to discharge. Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 15A in electric capacity.
CAUTION — Seat damage When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats.
To prevent overheating the seat warmer, do not place any- thing on the seats that insu- lates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat covers while the seat warmer is in operation.
Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers. Damage to the seat warming components could occur.
WARNING — Seat warmer burns
The seat warmer may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long peri- ods of time. The occupants must be able to feel if the seat is becoming too warm and to turn the seat warmer off. In particular, the driver must exercise extreme care for the following types of passengers: 1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals 4. Intoxicated individuals 5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.)
OSC047442N
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 124
4 125
Features of your vehicle
Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet. Close the cover when not in use. Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicles power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other elec- tronic systems or devices used in your vehicle. Using electrical products which exceed the limited capacity might cause heating to the power outlet and wiring that could lead to an elec- trical breakdown. Always make sure the electrical part is firmly plugged into the power outlet. Incomplete plugging may cause electrical break- down. Electrical products with a built-in bat- tery might cause current flow, which could lead to malfunction of the elec- tric/electronic device in your vehicle. Only use electrical products which include reverse current prevention
USB charger (if equipped)
The USB charger is designed to recharge batteries of small size elec- trical devices using a USB cable. The electrical devices can be recharged when the ignition switch is in ACC/ON/START position. The battery charging state may be monitored on the electrical device. Disconnect the USB cable from the USB port after use.
OYB046457
WARNING — Electric shock Do not put a finger or a foreign object (pen, etc.) into a power outlet and do not touch with a wet hand. You may receive an electric shock.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:43 PM Page 125
Features of your vehicle
1264
Some devices are not supported for fast charging but will be charged with normal speed.
Use the USB charger when the engine is running to prevent bat- tery discharge.
Only devices that fit the USB port can be used.
The USB charger can be used only for battery charging purposes.
Battery chargers cannot be charged.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
The clothes hanger is located on the roof of the rear seats.
OYB046450
CAUTION — Hanging clothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since those may damage the hook.
WARNING
Do not hang other objects such as hangers or hard objects except clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the clothe pockets. In an accident or when the curtain air bag is inflated, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.
OPS046500
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:44 PM Page 126
4 127
Features of your vehicle
Floor mat anchor(s)
When using a floor mat on the floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor(s) in the front and rear floor carpet of your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward.
The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat in the vehicle. Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.
Do not use ANY floor mat that can- not be firmly attached to the vehi- cle’s floor mat anchors.
Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. ,all-weather rub- ber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.
NOTICE Your vehicle was manufactured with driver’s side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, Kia recommends that only the Kia floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.
Shopping bag holder (if equipped)
OYB046448
WARNING — Aftermarket floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor mats that are not capable of being securely attached to the vehicle’s floor mat anchors. Unsecured floor mats can inter- fere with pedal operation.
CAUTION Do not hang a bag weighing
more than 7 lbs. (3 kg). It may cause damage to the shop- ping bag holder.
Do not hang a bag with frail objects when you drive on a rough road as the objects may be damaged.
OYB046449
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:44 PM Page 127
Features of your vehicle
1284
Covering shelf (for 5 door)
Use the cover to hide items stored in the cargo area. The covering shelf will be lifted when the tailgate is opened. Disconnect the strap (1) from holder if you want to return the cover to original position.To remove the covering shelf completely, lift the cover to a 43-degree angle and pull it out to the full (2). For installation of the cover, reverse the removal pro- cedure. When you return the covering shelf to its original position, hold the cover and lower it.
Never allow anyone to ride in the lug- gage compartment. It is designed for luggage only. Maintain the balance of the vehicle and locate the weight as far forward as possible.
OSC047435N
CAUTION Do not operate the vehicle
with the cover removed. It may damage the cover.
Since the covering shelf may be damaged or malformed, do not apply excessive force to the cover.
WARNING Do not place objects on the cov- ering shelf while driving. Such objects may be thrown about inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants during an accident or when braking.
SC USA 4.QXP 7/18/2018 5:44 PM Page 128
Audio system
Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 AUX, USB port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Audio (with touch screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Feature of your audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 SiriusXM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 FCC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
5
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:02 PM Page 1
Audio system
5 2
AUDIO SYSTEM NOTICE If you install an aftermarket HID head lamp, your vehicles audio and electronic device may malfunction.
Antenna Roof antenna
Your car uses a roof antenna to receive both AM and FM broadcast signals. This antenna is a removable type. To remove the antenna, turn it coun- terclockwise. To install the antenna, turn it clockwise. When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper reception. But it could be removed when parking the vehi- cle or when loading cargo on the roof rack.
When cargo is loaded on the roof rack, do not place the cargo near the antenna pole to ensure proper reception.
CAUTION Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove surely the anten- na by rotating it counter-clock- wise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.
OYB046453
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 2
Audio system
35
AUX, USB port (if equipped)
You can use the AUX port to connect audio devices and the USB port to plug in a USB device or iPod.
NOTICE When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.
How vehicle audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad- cast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercept- ed by the radio antenna on your vehi- cle. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers. When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehi- cle may not be strong and clear.
This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio sta- tions or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.
OSC047443N JBM001
FM reception
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 3
Audio system
5 4
AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broad- casts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low fre- quencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstruc- tions so that they can provide better signal coverage.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth’s surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are eas- ily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:
Fading — As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.
Flutter/Static — Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can dis- turb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.
JBM002
AM reception
JBM003
FM radio station
JBM004
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 4
Audio system
55
Station Swapping — As a FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
Multi-Path Cancellation — Radio sig- nals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.
Using a cellular phone or a two- way radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equip- ment. When using a communication sys- tem such as a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa- rate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehi- cle’s electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.
JBM005
WARNING Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone.
WARNING — Distracted driving
Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibili- ty is in the safe and legal opera- tion of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equip- ment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 5
Audio system
5 6
WARNING — Audio System
Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify this audio system. Such acts could result in fire or electric shock.
WARNING — Antenna Do not touch the antenna dur- ing thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 6
Audio system
75
iPod
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology A compatible Bluetooth Wireless Technology-enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth Wireless Technology. The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Bluetooth enabled cell phone is required to use Bluetooth Wireless Technology.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone compatibility can be checked by visiting http://www.kia.com.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 7
Audio system
5 8
AUDIO (With Touch Screen)
H8H4G0001EU
(With Bluetooth Wireless Technology)
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 8
Audio system
95
Feature of Your Audio
Head Unit
The actual image in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
(1) LCD screen Tap the screen to select a button.
(2) RADIO Start FM, AM and SiriusXM.
(3) MEDIA Select USB(iPod), Bluetooth
Wireless Technology(BT) Audio or AUX.
Display the media menu when two or more media are connected or when the [MEDIA] button is pressed in media mode.
(4) PHONE Start Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Phone mode.
(5) POWER/VOL knob Turn to adjust the volume. Press to turn the device on or off.
(6) RESET Shutdown and restart the system.
(7) SEEK/TRACK Search for frequencies in radio
mode. Change the current song in media
mode.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 9
Audio system
5 10
(8) DISP Turn the display on or off.
(9) CLOCK Display the time/date/day.
(10) SETUP Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,
Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings.
(11) TUNE knob Turn to navigate through the sta-
tions/songs list. Press to select an item.
WARNING — Clock Setting Distraction
Do not adjust the clock while driving.You may lose your steer- ing control and cause severe personal injury or accidents.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 10
Audio system
115
Steering wheel remote control
(Bluetooth Wireless Technology equipped model)
The actual image in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
(1) MODE Press the button to change the
mode in the following order: Radio Media.
Press and hold the button to turn off.
(2) VOLUME Press to adjust the volume.
(3) UP/DOWN Press the button in radio mode to
search Presets. Press and hold the button in radio
mode to search frequencies. Press the button in media mode to
change the current song. Press and hold the button in media
mode to quick search through songs.
(4) MUTE Press to mute audio output.
(5) CALL Pressing the button
— If not in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call. First press: Display Dial Number screen. Second press: Automatically dis- play the most recently Dialed call number. Third press: Dial the phone num- ber entered.
— Press in the Incoming Call notifi- cation screen to accept the phone call.
— Press in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode to switch to the waiting call.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 11
Audio system
5 12
Pressing and holding the button — If not in Bluetooth Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call, the most recently Dialed Call number is dialed.
— Press in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode to transfer the call to your cell phone.
— Press in cell phone mode to switch to Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree mode.
(6) END Press in Bluetooth Wireless
Technology Handsfree mode to end the phone call.
Press in the incoming call screen to reject the call.
Adjust the volume to levels that allow the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle. Driving in a state where external sounds cannot be heard may lead to acci- dents.
Pay attention to the volume setting when turning the device on. A sud- den output of extreme volume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.)
Turn on the car ignition before using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time with the ignition turned off as such operations may lead to battery discharge.
In case of product malfunction, please contact your place of pur- chase or After Service center.
Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.
WARNING Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle con- trol that may lead to an acci- dent, severe personal injury, and death. The drivers primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle sys- tems which take the drivers eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permis- sible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 12
Audio system
135
CAUTION When cleaning the device,
make sure to turn off the audio system and use a dry and smooth cloth.
Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.
Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deteriora- tion.
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil from contacting the dashboard because they may cause dam- age or discoloration.
Refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be hear as these signs may indi- cate product malfunction. Continued use in this condition may further damage the sys- tem.
CAUTION — LCD Monitor Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch screen.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 13
Audio system
5 14
Information on status icons Icons showing audio status are shown in the upper-right corner of the screen.
Icon Description
Mute Mute engaged
Battery Remaining battery life of a connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device
Handsfree + Audio streaming
connection
Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree call and audio streaming available
Handsfree connection
Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree call available
Bluetooth
Wireless Technology
audio streaming
Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio streaming available
Downloading contacts
Downloading contacts through Bluetooth
Wireless Technology wireless communications
Downloading call history
Downloading call history through Bluetooth
Wireless Technology wireless communications
Line busy Phone call in progress
Mute mic Mic muted during a call (caller cannot hear your voice)
Phone signal strength
Display the phone signal strength for a cell phone connected by Bluetooth Wireless Technology
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 14
Audio system
155
Radio
You can listen to FM, AM and SiriusXM radio.
(1) Band
Switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.
(2) Presets
Change the preset number on the main screen.
(3) List
Display all available stations.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Presets 1~40
Save or listen to favorite stations.
Switching between FM, AM and SiriusXM
Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.
Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.
Searching frequencies
Searching frequencies by pressing the [SEEK/TRACK] button on the product.
< Presets >
By selecting [< Presets >], the but- tons for Presets 1~40 displayed on the screen can be changed.
Presets 1~40
Select the button to listen to a preset. Press and hold the button number to save the current station. If the slot is empty, simply selecting saves the station to the slot.
List
A list of all available stations is dis- played. Select the desired station. Favorite stations can be saved to [Presets] by selecting [+].
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Presets: Save up to 40 frequently
used stations. To listen to a preset, select the desired station. Press and hold the desired slot from 1 through 40. This saves the current station in the selected slot. If the slot is empty, simply selecting saves the station to the slot.
Scan: All stations available in the current location of the vehicle are played for five seconds each.
Information: View detailed station information.
Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
Station Info: Set whether to receive station information such as Station Name, Program Type or Information.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 15
Audio system
5 16
NOTICE — SiriusXM Satellite Radio information
Satellite Radio channels: Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a 3-month trial subscription to the Sirius Select package. Youll get over variable channels, includ- ing commercialfree music, plus all your favorite sports, exclusive talk, entertainment, and a selec- tion of premium programming. For more information and a com- plete list of SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com in the United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Satellite Radio reception factors: To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehi- cle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception perform- ance:
(Continued)
(Continued) — Antenna obstructions: For opti-
mal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service: SiriusXM is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broad- casts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are avail- able for installation in motor vehi- cles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wire- less devices, and through an Internet connection on a personal computer. Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite Radio system include: — Hardware and an introductory
trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.
— For a small upgrade fee, access to SiriusXM music channels, and other select channels over the Internet using any computer con- nected to the Internet (U.S. cus- tomers only).
(Continued)
(Continued) SiriusXM services require a sub-
scription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous states, DC and Puerto Rico (with coverage limita- tions). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro- gramming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 16
Audio system
175
SiriusXM
(1) Band
Switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.
(2) Presets
Change the preset number on the main screen.
(3) List
Display all channels.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Presets 1~40
Save or listen to favorite channels.
(6) Play Live
Switches to the live broadcast mode.
(7) Skip Backward
Repeats the previously broadcasted program. — Holding for less than 0.8 seconds:
Moves to the previous segment. — Holding for over 1.0 seconds:
Moves to the previous 5 seconds.
(8) Play/Pause
Pauses/plays the current broadcast- ing program.
(9) Skip Forward
Moves to the next segment.
Switching between FM, AM and SiriusXM
Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.
Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.
Searching channels
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to search channels.
< Presets >
By selecting [< Presets >], the but- tons for Presets 1~40 displayed on the screen can be changed.
Presets 1~40
Select the button to listen to a preset. Press and hold the button number to save the current channel.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 17
Audio system
5 18
List
A list of all channels is displayed. Select the desired channel. Favorite channels can be saved to [Presets] by selecting [+].
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Presets: Save up to 40 frequently
used channels. To listen to a preset, select the desired channel. Press and hold the desired slot from 1 through 40. This saves the current channel in the selected slot. If the slot is empty, simply selecting saves the channel to the slot.
Categories: Channels can be searched by category.
Direct Tune: The desired channel can be selected by entering num- bers.
Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
Tag Song: Tag the current song information. When an Apple device (iPhone, iPod) is connected, tagged song information is sent automatically to the connected device.
NOTICE Up to 50 songs can be tagged.
Scan: All channels available in the vehicles current location are played for ten seconds each.
Program Schedule: View the pro- gram schedule.
Featured Favorites: The Featured Favorites feature allows SiriusXM to broadcast additional presets. — Example 1: During holidays,
Holiday Music might include all SiriusXM channels that are playing holiday music for easy access by users.
Multiple sets of Featured Favorites data can be broadcast by SiriusXM and can change from time to time.
Information: View detailed channel information.
Category Lock: Search or scan channels in the current category only.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 18
Audio system
195
Media
MP3 Supported audio formats
NOTICE File formats other than the formats above may not be recognized or playable. Information such as file- name may not be displayed.
Range of supported compressed file types
1. Bitrate range (Kbps)
2. Sampling frequency (Hz)
The sound quality of MP3/WMA compressed files may vary depend- ing on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate can have better sound quality.)
The product only recognizes files with the MP3 or WMA extension. Files without one of these exten- sions are not recognized.
3. Number of recognizable folders and files
Folders: 2,000 for USB Files: 6,000 for USB No recognition limit for folder hier-
archies
4. Character display range (Unicode) Filenames: Up to 64 English char-
acters (64 Korean characters) Foldernames: Up to 32 English
characters (32 Korean characters)
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 19
Audio system
5 20
Languages supported (Unicode support)
Korean: 2,604 characters English: 94 characters Common Chinese characters: 4,888
characters Special symbols: 986 characters
NOTICE Japanese/Simplified Chinese char- acters are not supported.
NOTICE — Using the USB Devices
Starting the vehicle while a USB device is connected can damage the device. Please disconnect USB devices before starting the vehicle.
Starting the vehicle or stopping the engine while an external USB device is connected can result in failure of the external USB device to operate.
Be cautious of static electricity when connecting/disconnecting external USB devices.
An encrypted MP3 player is not recognized when connected as an external device.
External USB devices may not be recognized, depending on the state of the external USB device.
Only products with byte/sectors formatted at 4 KB or lower are recognized.
Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32 format are recognized; NTFS and ExFAT file systems are not recog- nized.
Some USB devices are not recog- nized due to compatibility issues.
(Continued)
(Continued) Do not touch the USB connections. Connecting and disconnecting
USB devices rapidly over a short period of time can cause equip- ment failure.
Abnormal sounds may be audible when the USB device is discon- nected.
Turn the audio off before connect- ing or disconnecting external USB devices.
Recognition may take longer depending on the type, capacity or file format of the external USB device.
Image display and video playback are not supported.
Use of USB accessories, including charge and heat though the USB I/F, can lead to reduced product performance or malfunctions. Do not use USB devices or accessories for these purposes.
(Continued)
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 20
Audio system
215
(Continued) Use of aftermarket USB hubs and
extension cables can result in the vehicles audio system failing to recognize your USB device. Connect the USB device directly to the multimedia port of your vehicle.
When using high-capacity USB devices with logical drive divi- sions, only files saved on the high- est level logical drive can be played. If applications are loaded on a USB drive, file playback may fail.
Some MP3 players, cell phones, digital cameras, etc. (USB devices that are not recognized as mobile storage) may not operate normally when connected.
USB charging may not be sup- ported by some mobile devices.
Operation is guaranteed only for standard (Metal Cover Type) USB Memory drives.
Operation of HDD, CF, SD and memory stick devices is not guar- anteed.
(Continued)
(Continued) DRM (Digital Rights Management)
files cannot be played. SD-type USB memory, CF-type
USB memory, and other USB memory devices that require adapters for connection are not supported.
Proper operation of USB HDDs or USB drives with connectors that loosen due to vehicle vibrations is not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)
USB products that are used as key chains or cell phone accessories may damage the USB jack and affect proper file playback. Please refrain from use. Use only products with plug connectors, as shown in the follow- ing illustration.
When MP3 devices or cell phones are connected simultaneously through AUX, BT Audio and USB modes, a popping noise or mal- function may occur.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 21
Audio system
5 22
USB
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Select to skip to the desired location.
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [USB].
Connect a USB drive to the USB port to automatically play files on the USB drive.
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.
Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.
Search songs by turning TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play. Select and play the desired song.
Repeat play
Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat all, Repeat current song, Repeat folder or Repeat category. Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated. Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated. Repeat folder: All songs in the
current folder are repeated. Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 22
Audio system
235
NOTICE The repeat folder function is avail- able only when songs are playing from the [File] category under [List].
Shuffle play
Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle, Shuffle folder or Shuffle category play. Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order. Shuffle folder: Songs within
the current folder are played in ran- dom order.
Shuffle category: Songs within the current category are played in random order.
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Information: Detailed information
on the currently playing song is dis- played.
Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
NOTICE — Using the iPod
Devices To use the audio systems iPod
control function, use the dedicated cable provided with your iPod.
Connecting the iPod to the vehi- cle during play may result in a loud noise that lasts about one to two seconds. Connect the iPod to the vehicle after stopping or paus- ing play.
Connect the iPod with the vehicle in the ACC ON state to begin charging.
When connecting the iPod cable, be sure to fully push the cable into the port.
When EQ effects are enabled simultaneously on external devices, such as iPods and the audio system, the EQ effects may overlap, causing sound quality deterioration or distortion. Deactivate the EQ function for all external devices, if possible.
Noise may occur when your iPod
or the AUX port is connected. Disconnect and store separately when not in use.
(Continued)
(Continued) There may be noise if the audio
system is used with an iPod or AUX external device connected to the power jack. In these cases, dis- connect the iPod or external device from the power jack.
Play may be interrupted, or device malfunctions may occur depend- ing on the characteristics of your iPod/iPhone.
Play may fail if your iPhone is connected through both Bluetooth Wireless Technology and USB. In this case, select Dock connector or Bluetooth Wireless Technology on your iPhone to change the sound output settings.
If your software version does not support the communication proto- col or your iPod is not recognized due to device failure, anomalies or defects, iPod mode cannot be used.
The search and song play order in the iPod device may be different from the search order in the audio system.
(Continued)
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 23
Audio system
5 24
(Continued) If the iPod has failed due to an
internal defect, please reset the iPod (consult your iPod manual).
Depending on the software ver- sion, the iPod may fail to sync with the system. If the media is removed or disconnected before recognition, the previous mode may not be restored (iPad cannot be charged).
Cables other than the 1-meter cable provided with iPod/iPhone
products may not be recognized. When other music apps are used
on your iPod, the system sync function may fail due to malfunc- tion of the iPod application.
iPod
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) List
View a list of all songs.
(4) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(5) Album Image
View song info.
(6) Pause
Pause or play music.
(7) Playback progress
Select to skip to the desired location.
Playback
Connect your iPod to the audio USB port, press the [MEDIA] but- ton, and select [iPod].
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.
Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.
Search songs by turning the TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.
Selecting songs from a list
Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play. Select and play the desired song.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 24
Audio system
255
Repeat play
Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat category, Repeat current song. Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category. Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated.
Shuffle play
Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle category play. Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in random order.
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Information: Detailed info on the
currently playing song is displayed. Sound Settings: Audio sound set-
tings can be changed.
When other music programs are running
When songs saved on your iPod
are playing through a separate music app, the following screen is dis- played. (1) Play/Pause: Pause or play music.
(2) Play iPod Files: Play music saved on your iPod.
(3) Album Image: View playback info.
NOTICE Operation cannot be carried out correctly due to iPod application malfunction.
Playing iPod files
Select [Play iPod Files] to play songs saved on your iPod. If there are no songs saved on your iPod, the [Play iPod Files] is dis- abled.
WARNING — Distracted driving
Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibili- ty is in the safe and legal opera- tion of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equip- ment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 25
Audio system
5 26
NOTICE — Using Bluetooth
Wireless Technology Audio Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Audio mode can only be used if a Bluetooth Wireless Technology- enabled phone is connected. Only devices that support Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio can be used.
If the Bluetooth Wireless Technology-enabled phone is dis- connected during play, the music stops.
When the TRACK UP/DOWN buttons are used during Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio stream- ing, a popping noise or sound inter- ruptions may occur, depending on the cell phone device.
Depending on the cell phone model, the audio streaming func- tion may not be supported.
If a phone call is made or received when music is playing in Bluetooth Wireless Technology Audio mode, the call may mix with the music.
(Continued)
(Continued) When returning to Bluetooth
Wireless Technology Audio mode after ending a call, play might not resume automatically for some cell phone models.
Precautions for Safe Driving
Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree is a feature that enables drivers to practice safe driving. Connecting the car audio system with a Bluetooth Wireless Technology phone allows the user to conveniently make calls, receive calls, and manage the phone book. Before using the Bluetooth Wireless Technology, carefully read the con- tents of this users manual.
WARNING — Distracted driving
Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibili- ty is in the safe and legal opera- tion of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equip- ment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 26
Audio system
275
Bluetooth Wireless Technology (BT) Audio
(1) Repeat
Enable/disable repeat.
(2) Shuffle
Enable/disable shuffle play.
(3) Menu
Navigate to the menu screen.
(4) Play/Pause
Pause or play music.
NOTICE Some cell phone models may not
support particular functions. Bluetooth Wireless Technology
audio volume is synced with cell phone media volume.
Playback
Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [BT Audio].
Changing songs
Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.
NOTICE Some cell phones may not support this function.
Repeat play
Select [Repeat] to enable or disable Repeat all, Repeat current song or Repeat category. Repeat all: All songs in the
playlist are repeated. Repeat current song: The cur-
rently playing song is repeated. Repeat category: Repeat all
songs in the current category.
NOTICE The repeat play function is engaged depending on the operation of the connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
Shuffle play
Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable Shuffle, Shuffle category play. Shuffle: Songs are played in
random order. Shuffle category: Songs within
the current category are played in random order.
NOTICE The repeat play function is engaged depending on the operation of the connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 27
Audio system
5 28
Menu
Select [Menu], and select the desired function. Connections: The currently connect-
ed Bluetooth Wireless Technology device can be changed.
Information: Detailed information on the currently playing song is dis- played.
Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
AUX
Running AUX
Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [AUX].
Connect the external device con- nection jack to the AUX terminal to run AUX.
(1) Sound Settings: Audio sound set- tings can be changed.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 28
Audio system
295
Phone
NOTICE — Using Bluetooth Wireless Technology Phone
Bluetooth Wireless Technology is a near-field wireless networking technology that uses the 2.4 GHz frequency to connect various devices within a certain distance wirelessly.
The technology is used in PCs, peripherals, Bluetooth Wireless Technology phones, tablet PCs, household appliances and automo- biles. Devices supporting Bluetooth Wireless Technology can exchange data at high speeds without physi- cal cable connections.
Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree devices enable conven- ient access to phone functions through cell phones equipped with Bluetooth Wireless Technology.
Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices may not be supported by the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function.
(Continued)
(Continued) When BluetoothWireless Technology
is connected and calls are attempt- ed through a connected cell phone from outside the vehicle, the call is connected through the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function of the vehicle.
Please be sure to disconnect the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Handsfree function through your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device or the audio screen.
The BluetoothWireless Technology Handsfree function helps drivers to drive safely. By connecting a Bluetooth Wireless Technology- enabled phone to the vehicles audio system, phone calls can be made and received through the audio system and contacts can be managed. Consult the user manual before use.
WARNING — Distracted driving
Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibili- ty is in the safe and legal opera- tion of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equip- ment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 29
Audio system
5 30
Precautions when connecting Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices
The vehicle supports the following Bluetooth Wireless Technology functions. Some Bluetooth
Wireless Technology devices may not support some functions. 1) Bluetooth Wireless Technology
Handsfree phone calls 2) Operations during a call (Private,
Switch, Out Vol. controls) 3) Download call history saved to
the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device
4) Download contacts saved to the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device
5) Automatic contacts/call history download when Bluetooth
Wireless Technology is connected 6) Automatic Bluetooth Wireless
Technology device connection when the vehicle is started
7) Bluetooth Wireless Technology audio streaming playback
Before connecting the audio sys- tem to your device, make sure your device supports Bluetooth Wireless Technology.
Even if your device supports Bluetooth Wireless Technology, a Bluetooth Wireless Technology connection cannot be established if the devices Bluetooth Wireless Technology function is switched off. Search and connect with the Bluetooth
Wireless Technology function enabled. Pair or connect Bluetooth Wireless
Technology devices to the audio system with the vehicle at a standstill.
If a Bluetooth Wireless Technology connection is lost due to abnormal conditions while a Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device is connect- ed (communication range exceed- ed, device power OFF, communi- cation errors, etc.), the disconnect- ed Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is searched for and auto- matically reconnected.
If you want to disable the Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device auto connect function, turn the Bluetooth
Wireless Technology function OFF on your device when you are not driv- ing or when the car is parked. Consult the user manuals for individ- ual devices to see whether Bluetooth Wireless Technology is supported.
Handsfree call quality and volume may vary depending on the type of Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 30
Audio system
315
Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices are subject to intermittent Bluetooth Wireless Technology connection failures. In this case, use the following method. 1) Turn the Bluetooth Wireless
Technology function off on your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device Turn it on and try again.
2) Delete the paired device from both the audio system and Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, then pair again.
3) Power down your Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device Turn it on and try again.
4) Completely remove the battery from your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device; reinsert it, reboot, and attempt connection.
5) Restart the vehicle and reat- tempt connection.
Pairing a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device
Information on pairing Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices
Pairing refers to the process of pair- ing Bluetooth Wireless Technology cell phones or devices with the system prior to connection. This is a necessary procedure for Bluetooth
Wireless Technology connection and usage.
Up to five devices can be paired.
Pairing the first Bluetooth Wireless Technology device
Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control Search for the vehicle from the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, and pair Enter the passkey on the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device or approve passkey Bluetooth Wireless Technology pair- ing completed.
1. When the [PHONE] button on the audio or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control is pressed, the following screen is dis- played. Devices can now be paired.
(1) Vehicle Name: Searched name in Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
NOTICE The vehicle name in the image above is an example. Refer to your device for the actual name of your device.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 31
Audio system
5 32
2. Search for available Bluetooth
Wireless Technology devices in the Bluetooth Wireless Technology menu of your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device (cell phone, etc.).
3. Confirm that the vehicle name in your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device matches the vehicle name shown on the audio screen, then select it.
4-1. For devices that require passkey entry, a passkey entry screen is shown on your Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device. — Enter the passkey 0000, in your
Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
4-2. For devices that require passkey confirmation, the following screen is shown on the audio system. A 6-digit passkey input screen is shown in the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
— After confirming that the 6-digit passkey on the audio screen and the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device are identical, select [OK] in your Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device.
NOTICE The 6-digit passkey in the image above is an example. Refer to your vehicle for the actual passkey.
Pairing a second Bluetooth Wireless Technology device
Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Bluetooth] Select [Connections] Select [Add New].
— The pairing procedure from this point is identical to [Pairing the first Bluetooth device].
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 32
Audio system
335
NOTICE Bluetooth Wireless Technology
standby mode lasts for three min- utes. If a device is not paired within three minutes, pairing is canceled. Start over from the beginning.
For most Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices, a connection is established automatically after pairing. Some devices, however, require separate confirmation when connecting after pairing. Be sure to check your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device after pairing to confirm that it has con- nected.
Connecting Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices
If there are no connected devices
Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button in the steering wheel remote control List of paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices Select the desired Bluetooth Wireless Technology device from the list Connect Bluetooth
Wireless Technology.
If there are connected devices
Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Settings] Select [Connections] Select Bluetooth Wireless Technology device to connect Select [Connect] Connect Bluetooth Wireless Technology.
NOTICE Only one Bluetooth Wireless
Technology device can be connected at a time.
When a Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is connected, other devices cannot be paired.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 33
Audio system
5 34
Accepting/rejecting phone calls Receiving phone calls with Bluetooth Wireless Technology con- nected.
(1) Caller name: If the caller number is in your contacts, the correspon- ding name is displayed.
(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.
(3) Accept: Accept call. (4) Reject: Reject call.
NOTICE When the incoming call screen is
displayed, audio mode and the set- tings screen cannot be shown. Only call volume control is sup- ported.
Some BluetoothWireless Technology devices may not support the call reject function.
Some BluetoothWireless Technology devices may not support the phone number display function.
Operation during calls Incoming call with Bluetooth
Wireless Technology connected Select [Accept].
(1) Call duration: Call duration display. (2) Caller name: If the caller number is
in your contacts, the corresponding name is displayed.
(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.
(4) Keypad: Number keypad for Automatic Response Service input is displayed.
(5) Private: Call is transferred to a cell phone.
(6) Outgoing Volume: Adjust outgo- ing voice volume.
(7) End: End call.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 34
Audio system
355
NOTICE Some Bluetooth Wireless Technology
devices may not support the Private function.
The outgoing voice volume may vary depending on the type of Bluetooth Wireless Technology device. If the outgoing voice vol- ume is too high or low, adjust the Out Vol.
Favorites Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Favorites] Favorites list displayed.
(1) Favorites list: A list of paired favorites is displayed. Connect a call when selected.
(2) Add to Favorites: Add a down- loaded phone number to favorites.
(3) Delete: Delete a saved favorites.
NOTICE Up to 20 favorites can be paired
for each paired Bluetooth Wireless Technology device.
Favorites can be accessed when the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device they were paired from is connected.
The audio system does not down- load favorites from Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices. Favorites must be newly saved before use.
To add to favorites, contacts must be downloaded first.
Saved favorites are not updated even if the contacts of the connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device are changed. In this case, favorites need to be deleted and added again.
Call history Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Call history] Call history is displayed.
(1) Call history: Display the down- loaded call history list. Connect a call when selected.
(2) Sort by: Sort by all calls, dialed calls, received calls or missed calls.
(3) Download: Download call history from connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices.
NOTICE Up to 50 dialed, received and
missed calls are saved. When the latest call history is
received, the existing call history is deleted.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 35
Audio system
5 36
Contacts Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system Select [Contacts] Select letter (ABC) Contacts dis- played.
(1) Contacts: Display downloaded contacts. Connect a call when selected.
(2) Download: Download contacts from connected Bluetooth
Wireless Technology devices.
NOTICE Only supported contacts format
can be downloaded and displayed from the Bluetooth Wireless Technology device, contacts from some applications will not be included.
Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved. In some cases, additional confir-
mation from your Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is nec- essary when downloading con- tacts. If downloading of contacts unsuccessful, consult your Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices settings or the audio screen to approve the download.
Contacts without phone numbers are not displayed.
Dial Press the [PHONE] button on the audio Select [Dial].
(1) Phone number entry window: The phone number entered using the keypad is displayed.
(2) Clear — Select to delete individual digits. — Press and hold to delete the
entire phone number. (3) Keypad: Enter phone number. (4) Bluetooth Wireless Technology
phone name — The name of the connected
Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is displayed.
— Contacts matching the keypad number/letter input are displayed.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 36
Audio system
375
(5) Call — Enter and select a phone num-
ber to call. — Select without entering a phone
number to see the most recent dialed call.
Connections (if equipped) Press the [PHONE] button on the audio Select [Connections]. — For connections setting, refer to
Setup Select [Bluetooth] Select [Connections] page.
Setup Press the [PHONE] button on the audio Select [Settings]. — For phone Setup, refer to Setup
page Select [Bluetooth].
Setup
Access Display, Sound, Date/Time, Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings. Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system.
Display Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Display]. Mode: Audio screen brightness
can be adjusted to the time of day. Illumination: The brightness of the
audio screen can be changed.
WARNING — Distracted driving
Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibili- ty is in the safe and legal opera- tion of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equip- ment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 37
Audio system
5 38
Sound Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Sound]. Position: Sound balance and pan-
ning can be adjusted. Tone: Sound tone color can be
adjusted. Back-up Warning Priority: Automatically
lower audio volume while reversing. Speed Dependent Volume:
Automatically adjust volume based on vehicle speed.
Beep: Select whether to play a sound when the screen is touched.
Date/Time Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Date/Time]. Set Time: Set the time displayed on
the audio screen. Time Format: Choose between 12-
hour and 24-hour time formats. Set Date: Set the date displayed on
the audio screen.
Bluetooth Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Bluetooth]. Connections: Control pairing, dele-
tion, connection and disconnection of Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices.
Auto Connection Priority: Set the connection priority of Bluetooth
Wireless Technology devices when the vehicle is started.
Download Contacts: Contacts can be downloaded from connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology devices.
Bluetooth Voice Prompts: Play or mute voice prompts for Bluetooth
Wireless Technology device pair- ing, connection and errors.
NOTICE When paired devices are deleted,
the call history and contacts of the device saved to the audio system are deleted.
For Bluetooth Wireless Technology connections with low connection pri- ority, some time may be required for the connection to be established.
Contacts can be downloaded only from the currently connected Bluetooth Wireless Technology device. If no Bluetooth Wireless Technology device is connected, the download contacts button is disabled.
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 38
Audio system
395
System Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [System]. Language: Change the user lan-
guage. System Information: At the System
Information screen, Software version information, updates are available. — System Update: At the System
Information screen, insert the USB memory with the latest file downloaded, and then select the [Update] to begin updating. The system with then reboot auto- matically.
NOTICE This product needs supplemented
software updates and additional functions, which collectively may take some time to complete, depending on the amount of data.
If the Power is disconnected or the USB is removed during an update, the data might be damaged. Please wait until the update is complete while engine is on.
Screen Saver Set the information displayed when the audio system is switched off or the screen is turned off. Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Screen Saver]. Analog: An analog clock is dis-
played. Digital: A digital clock is displayed. None: No information is displayed.
Display Off To prevent glare, the screen can be turned off with the audio system in operation. Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system Select [Display Off].
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 39
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi- dential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel- evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor- rect the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.
Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void your authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.
This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum 20 cm between the radiator and your body. This trans- mitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the FCC.
Declaration of Conformity
405
Audio system
SC USA 5(audio).qxp 7/18/2018 6:03 PM Page 40
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Before entering vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Necessary inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Ignition switch position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Automatic transmission operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Good driving practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Good braking practices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Forward Collision-avoidance Assist (FCA) system (Radar type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 System setting and activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
FCA warning message and system control. . . . . . . . 6-32
Brake operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in front
(front radar). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Limitation of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41 Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
To set cruise control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
To increase cruise control set speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42
To decrease the cruising speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise
control on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
To cancel cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
To turn cruise control off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Sport mode integrated control system . . . . . . . . . 6-46 Sport mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49 Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
6
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 1
6
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54 Snowy or Icy conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Check battery and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Change to winter weight oil if necessary . . . . . . . 6-57
Check spark plugs and ignition system. . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
To keep locks from freezing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Use approved window washer anti-freeze
in system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Don’t let your parking brake freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Don’t let ice and snow accumulate underneath . . . . 6-57
Carry emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59 Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 2
6 3
Driving your vehicle
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over some- thing that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, have the exhaust sys- tem checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING — Engine exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or leave your engine running in an enclosed area for a prolonged time. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause uncon- sciousness and death by asphyxiation.
WARNING — Open trunk/tailgate
Do not drive with the trunk/tail- gate open. Poisonous exhaust gases can enter the passenger compart- ment. If you must drive with the trunk/tailgate open proceed as follows: 1.Close all windows. 2.Open side vents. 3.Set the air intake control at
Fresh, the air flow control at Floor or Face and the fan at the highest speed.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 3
Driving your vehicle
46
Before entering vehicle Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are clean.
Check the condition of the tires. Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks. Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis, with the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further details are provided in Chapter 8, Maintenance.
Before starting Close and lock all doors. Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached. Buckle your seat belt. Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors. Be sure that all lights work. Check all gauges. Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes off.
For safe operation, be sure you are familiar with your vehicle and its equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING — Distracted driving
Focus on the road while driving. The driver’s primary responsi- bility is in the safe and legal operation of the vehicle. Use of any hand held devices, other equipment or vehicle systems that distract the driver should not be used during vehicle operation.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 4
6 5
Driving your vehicle
WARNING — Check sur- roundings
Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for peo- ple, especially children, before putting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
WARNING — Fire risk When you intend to park or stop the vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of time. It may overheat the engine or exhaust system and cause fire.
WARNING — Loose objects
Securely store items in your vehicle. When you make a sud- den stop or turn the steering wheel rapidly, loose objects may drop on the floor and it could interfere with the opera- tion of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident.
WARNING — Driving while intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated. Drinking and driving is danger- ous. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Driving while under the influ- ence of drugs is as dangerous as or more dangerous than driv- ing drunk.
WARNING — Proper footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, sandals, etc.) may inter- fere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedals.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 5
Driving your vehicle
66
Ignition switch position LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect against theft. The ignition key can be removed only in the LOCK position. When turning the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- tion, push the key inward at the ACC position and turn the key toward the LOCK position.
The anti-theft steering column lock is not a substitute for the parking brake. Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in 1st gear for the Manual Transmission or P (Park) for the Automatic Transmission, set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off.
ACC (Accessory) The steering wheel is unlocked and electrical accessories are operative. If difficulty is experienced turning the ignition switch to the ACC position, turn the key while turning the steer- ing wheel right and left to release the tension.
ON The warning lights can be checked before the engine is started. This is the normal running position after the engine is started. Do not leave the ignition switch ON if the engine is not running to prevent battery discharge.
KEY POSITIONS
OSC057001N
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 6
6 7
Driving your vehicle
START Turn the ignition switch to the START position to start the engine. The engine will crank until you release the key; then it returns to the ON position. The brake warning light can be checked in this position.
NOTICE If you leave the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position for a long time, the battery may discharge.
WARNING — Ignition switch
Never turn the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC while the vehicle is moving. This would result in loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.
WARNING — Steering wheel
Never reach for any controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. The presence of your hand or arm in this area could cause a loss of vehicle control.
WARNING — Key holder Do not attach small purses, multiple keys, or any other heavy accessories to the dri- ver’s key chain used to start the vehicle. This may cause the driver to accidentally make the key inserted in the vehicle to change the ignition position to the ACC position while the vehi- cle is moving thereby increas- ing the risk of an accident and causing the deactivation of sev- eral safety features.
WARNING — Leaving the vehicle
To avoid unexpected or sudden vehicle movement, never leave your vehicle if the transmission is not locked in the P (Park) position and the parking brake is fully engaged. Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in P (Park), set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 7
Driving your vehicle
86
Starting the engine Starting the engine with an igni- tion key 1.Make sure the parking brake is
applied. 2.Automatic Transaxle — Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park). Depress the brake pedal fully. You can also start the engine when the shift lever is in the N (Neutral) position.
3.Turn the ignition switch to START and hold it there until the engine starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), then release the key.
It should be started without depressing the accelerator. 4.Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains sta- tionary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.)
If the engine stalls while the vehicle is in motion, do not attempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- tion. If traffic and road conditions per- mit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and turn the ignition switch to the START position in an attempt to restart the engine.
WARNING — Proper footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots, sandals, etc.) may inter- fere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedals.
CAUTION — Starter Do not engage the starter for more than 10 seconds. If the engine stalls or fails to start, wait 5 to 10 seconds before re- engaging the starter. Improper use of the starter may damage it.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 8
6 9
Driving your vehicle
Automatic Transmission oper- ation The automatic transmission has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the shift lever.
NOTICE For the first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been dis- connected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the TCM (Transmission Control Module) or PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
OYB056071
+ (UP)
Button
Shift lever
— (DOWN)
To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the button when shifting.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 9
Driving your vehicle
106
For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neutral) to a forward or reverse gear.
When stopped on an incline, do not hold the vehicle stationary with engine power. Use the service brake or the parking brake.
Transmission ranges The indicator light in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever posi- tion when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from rotat- ing.
CAUTION — Transmission To avoid damage to your trans- mission, do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any for- ward gear position with the brakes on. The transmission may be damaged if you shift into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING — Automatic Transmission
Before leaving the driver’s seat, always make sure the shift lever is engaged in P (Park), set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.
WARNING Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle.
WARNING ALWAYS check the surround-
ing areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
Do not use engine braking (rapidly shifting from a high gear to lower gear) on slippery roads. The vehicle may slip causing an accident.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 10
6 11
Driving your vehicle
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not engaged. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the parking brake or service brakes are applied.
— Parking in N (Neutral) gear Follow the steps below when parking and you want the vehicle to move when pushed. 1.After parking your vehicle, step on
the brake pedal and move the shift lever to [P] with the ignition button in [ON] or while the engine is running.
2.If the parking brake is applied unlock the parking brake.
3.While pressing the brake pedal, turn the ignition button [OFF].
4.Change the gear shift lever to [N] (Neutral) while pressing the brake pedal and pushing [SHIFT LOCK RELEASE] button or inserting a tool (e.g. flathead screw-driver) into the [SHIFT LOCK RELEASE] access hole at the same time. Then, the vehicle will move when external force is applied.
WARNING With the exception of parking
in neutral gear, always park the vehicle in [P] (Park) for safety and engage the parking brake.
Before parking in N (Neutral) gear, first make sure the park- ing ground is level and flat. Do not park in [N] gear on any slopes or gradients. If parked and left in [N], the vehicle may move and cause serious damage and injury.
CAUTION — Shifting Always come to a complete stop before shifting into or out of R (Reverse); you may damage the transmission if you shift into R (Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion, except when «Rocking the Vehicle» explained in this chapter.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 11
Driving your vehicle
126
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving position. The transmission will auto- matically shift through a 6-gear sequence, providing the best fuel economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth- er vehicle or climbing grades, depress the accelerator fully, at which time the transmission will automatically downshift to the next lower gear. Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stopped or in motion, manual mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range opera- tion, push the shift lever back into the main gate.
In manual mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to make gearshifts rapidly. In contrast to a manual transmission, the manual mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.
In manual mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, being careful to keep the engine speed below the red zone.
In manual mode, only the 6 forward gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required.
In manual mode, downshifts are made automatically when the vehi- cle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.
In manual mode, when the engine rpm approaches the red zone, shift points are varied to upshift auto- matically.
OYB056059
+ (UP)
— (DOWN)
Manual mode
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 12
6 13
Driving your vehicle
To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute cer- tain gearshifts when the shift lever is operated.
When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the +(up) position. This causes the transmission to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the -(down) side to shift back to the 1st gear. Shift-lock override
(with smart key system)
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position into the R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal depressed, continue depress- ing the brake, then do the following: 1. Carefully remove the cap covering
the shift-lock access hole (1). 2. Insert screwdriver into the access
hold and press down on the screwdriver.
3. Move the shift lever. 4. Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Kia dealer immediately.
Ignition key interlock system (if equipped) The ignition key cannot be removed unless the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
OSC057011N
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 13
Driving your vehicle
146
Good driving practices Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.
Never move the shift lever into P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion. Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged.
Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the trans- mission in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.
Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a standing start To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, release the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the appropriate gear depend- ing on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the parking brake. Depress the accelerator grad- ually while releasing the service brakes.
WARNING Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 14
6 15
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage. In the event that the power-assisted brakes lose power because of a stalled engine or some other reason, you can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than you normally would. The stopping distance, however, will be longer. When the engine is not running, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted. Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering con- trol on slippery surfaces.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicles ability to safely slow down; the vehi- cle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fash- ion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, apply them lightly while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING — Steep hill braking
Avoid continuous application of the brakes when descending a long or steep hill by shifting to a lower gear. Continuous brake application will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.
CAUTION — Brake pedal Do not drive with your foot rest- ing on the brake pedal. This will create abnormally high brake temperatures which can cause excessive brake lining and pad wear.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 15
Driving your vehicle
166
In the event of brake failure If service brakes fail to operate while the vehicle is in motion, you can make an emergency stop with the parking brake. The stopping dis- tance, however, will be much greater than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes (if equipped). You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur when- ever you depress the brake pedal. Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor- mal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes. Always replace the front or rear brake pads as pairs.
CAUTION — Replace brake pads
Do not continue to drive with worn brake pads. Continuing to drive with worn brake pads can damage the braking system and result in costly brake repairs.
WARNING — Brake wear Do not ignore high pitched wear sounds from your brakes. If you ignore this audible warning, you will eventually lose braking per- formance, which could lead to a serious accident.
WARNING — Parking brake Avoid applying the parking brake to stop the vehicle while it is moving except in an emer- gency situation. Applying the parking brake while the vehicle is moving at normal speeds can cause a sudden loss of control of the vehicle. If you must use the parking brake to stop the vehicle, use great caution in applying the brake.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 16
6 17
Driving your vehicle
Rear drum brakes (if equipped) Your rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators. Therefore, have the rear brake linings inspected if you hear a rear brake rubbing noise. Also have your rear brakes inspected each time you change or rotate your tires and when you have the front brakes replaced.
Parking brake Applying the parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then without pressing the release button in, pull the parking brake lever up as far as possible. In addition it is recommend- ed that when parking the vehicle on a gradient, the shift lever should be positioned in the P (Park) position for Automatic Transmission vehicles.
CAUTION — Parking brake Driving with the parking brake applied will cause excessive brake pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear.
OYB056060
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 17
Driving your vehicle
186
Releasing the parking brake
To release the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly. Secondly, press the release button (1) and lower the parking brake lever (2) while holding the button.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, don’t let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid cleeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped.
Be cautious when parking on a hill. Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (Automatic Transmission). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.
WARNING — Parking brake use
Never allow a passenger to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.
All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedestrians.
OYB056061
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 18
6 19
Driving your vehicle
Under some conditions your park- ing brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most like- ly to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice aroud or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (Automatic Transmission) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.
Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the trans- mission to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.
Check the brake warning light by turning the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine). This light will illumi- nate when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position. Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off. If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction in the brake system. Immediate attention is nec- essary.
If at all possible, stop driving the vehicle immediately. If that is not pos- sible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only con- tinue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop.
W-75
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 19
Driving your vehicle
206
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci- dents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds in the following cir- cumstances: When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads When driving with tire chains
installed When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has differ- ent surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increases the stopping distance for your vehi- cle.
The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels. If the wheels are going to lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels. When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a tik-tik sound from the brakes, or feel a cor- responding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active. In order to obtain the maximum ben- efit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Press your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the situation allows the ABS to control the force being delivered to the brakes.
NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehi- cle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.
Even with the anti-lock brake sys- tem, your vehicle still requires suf- ficient stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.
Always slow down when cornering. The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speeds.
On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stop- ping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:30 PM Page 20
6 21
Driving your vehicle
The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the ignition switch is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through self- diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS but your regular brakes will work normally. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
When you drive on a road with poor traction, such as an icy road, and operated your brakes continu- ously, the ABS will be active con- tinuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull your vehi- cle over to a safe place and stop the engine.
Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light goes off, then your ABS system is normal. Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS. Contact an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible.
NOTICE When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS has mal- functioned. Do not pump your brakes! Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability control (ESC) system is designed to stabi- lize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the brakes on individual wheels and intervenes with the engine manage- ment system to stabilize the vehicle.
W-78
OYB056062
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 6:07 PM Page 21
Driving your vehicle
226
Electronic stability control (ESC) will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in serious accidents. Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding maneuvers that cause the vehicle to lose traction. Even with ESC installed, always follow all the normal precautions for driving — including driving at safe speeds for the condi- tions. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system is an electronic sys- tem designed to help the driver main- tain vehicle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors includ- ing speed, road conditions and driv- er steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in pre- venting a loss of control. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a tik-tik sound from the brakes, or feel a cor- responding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.
ESC operation ESC ON condition
When the ignition is turned ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately 3 sec- onds, then ESC is turned on.
Press the ESC OFF but- ton for at least half a sec- ond after turning the igni- tion ON to turn ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator will illuminate). To turn the ESC on, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light will go off).
When starting the engine, you may hear a slight tick- ing sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system self-check and does not indicate a prob- lem.
WARNING For maximum protection, always wear your seat belt. No system, no matter how advanced, can compensate for all driver error and/or driving conditions. Always drive responsibly.
—
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 22
6 23
Driving your vehicle
When operating
When the ESC is in opera- tion, ESC indicator light blinks. When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat- ing properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehi- cle. This is only the effect of brake control and indi- cates nothing unusual.
When moving out of the mud or slippery road, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) to increase.
ESC operation off ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of ESC off states. If the engine stops when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again.
ESC off state 1 : Traction Control disabled
To turn off the traction control func- tion and only operate the brake con- trol function of the ESC, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for less than 3 seconds and the ESC OFF indicator light (ESC OFF ) will illuminate. At this state, only the brake function will operate.
OYB056012
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 23
Driving your vehicle
246
ESC off state 2 : Traction & Stability Control disabled
To turn off the traction control func- tion and the brake control function of the ESC, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for more than 3 sec- onds. ESC OFF indicator light (ESC OFF ) will illuminate and ESC OFF warning chime will sound. At this state, the car stability control function does not operate any more.
Indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned ON, the indicator light illuminates, then goes off if ESC system is oper- ating normally. The ESC indicator light blinks when- ever ESC is operating or illuminates when ESC fails to operate. The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.
OYB056013
ESC indicator light
ESC OFF indicator light
WARNING Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your origi- nal tires.
WARNING — Electronic sta- bility control
Drive carefully even though your vehicle has Electronic Stability Control. It can only assist you in maintaining con- trol under certain circum- stances.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 24
6 25
Driving your vehicle
ESC OFF usage When driving
Its a good idea to keep the ESC turned on for daily driving whenev- er possible.
To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.
Hill-start assist control (HAC) The Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling back by applying the brakes automatically for about 2 seconds. The brakes are released when the accelerator pedal is depressed or after about 2 seconds. The HAC is activated only for about 2 seconds, so when the vehicle is starting off always depress the accel- erator pedal.
WARNING — Operating ESC
Never press the ESC OFF but- ton while ESC is operating. If the ESC is turned off while ESC is operating, the vehicle may go out of control.
WARNING — Maintaining Brake Pressure on Incline
HAC does not replace the need to apply brakes while stopped on an incline. While stopped, make sure you maintain brake pres- sure sufficient to prevent your vehicle from rolling backward and causing an accident. Dont release the brake pedal until you are ready to accelerate forward.
CAUTION The HAC does not operate
when the transmission shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position.
The HAC activates even though the ESC is off but it does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 25
Driving your vehicle
266
Vehicle stability management (VSM) This system is designed to provide further enhancements to vehicle sta- bility and steering responses when a vehicle is driving on a slippery road or a vehicle detected changes in coefficient of friction between right wheels and left wheels when brak- ing.
VSM operation When the VSM is in operation, ESC indicator light ( ) blinks. When the vehicle stability manage- ment is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle and/or abnormal steering responses (EPS). This is only the effect of brake and EPS control and indicates noth- ing unusual.
The VSM does not operate when:
Driving on bank roads such as gra- dient or incline
Driving in reverse ESC OFF indicator light ( )
remains on the instrument cluster EPS indicator light remains on the
instrument cluster
VSM operation off If you press the ESC OFF button to turn off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illuminates. To turn on the VSM, press the button again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes out.
WARNING — Vehicle stabili- ty management
Drive carefully even though your vehicle has Vehicle stability man- agement. It can only assist you in maintaining control under cer- tain circumstances.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 26
6 27
Driving your vehicle
Malfunction indicator The VSM can be deactivated even if you dont cancel the VSM operation by pressing the ESC OFF button. It indicates that a malfunction has been detected somewhere in the Electric Power Steering system or VSM system. If the ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS warning light remains on, take your vehicle to an authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked. The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) on curves.
The VSM is designed to function above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h) when a vehicle is braking on a split-mu road. The split-mu road is made of surfaces which have dif- ferent friction forces.
Your vehicle is designed to activate according to the drivers intention, even with installed VSM. Always follow all the normal precautions for driving at safe speeds for the conditions including driving in inclement weather and on a slip- pery road.
WARNING For maximum protection, always wear your seat belt. No system, no matter how advanced, can compensate for all driver error and/or driving conditions. Always drive responsibly.
WARNING — Tire/Wheel size
When replacing tires and wheels, make sure they are the same size as the original tires and wheels installed. Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may affect the vehicle’s han- dling.
WARNING The Vehicle Stability Management system is not a substitute for safe driving prac- tices but a supplementary func- tion only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. Always hold the steering wheel firmly while driv- ing.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 27
Driving your vehicle
286
Good braking practices Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and that the park- ing brake indicator light is out before driving away.
Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet when the vehicle is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the vehicle under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized Kia dealer for assis- tance.
Don’t coast down hills with the vehicle out of gear.This is extreme- ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed.
Don’t «ride» the brake pedal. Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be danger- ous because the brakes might overheat and lose their effective- ness. It also increases the wear of the brake components.
If a tire goes flat while you are driv- ing, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place.
If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transmission, don’t let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped.
Be cautious when parking on a hill. Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (Automatic Transmission). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels.
Under some conditions your park- ing brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most like- ly to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (Automatic Transmission) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 28
6 29
Driving your vehicle
Do not hold the vehicle on an incline with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transmission to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 29
Driving your vehicle
306
The FCA system is designed to detect and monitor a vehicle ahead in the roadway through sensors (i.e., radar) to warn the driver that a colli- sion is imminent and, if necessary, apply emergency braking. Radar type FCA system does not
operate to detect pedestrians in front.
System setting and activation System setting The driver can activate the FCA by placing the ignition switch to the ON position and by selecting ‘User Settings’ ‘Driver Assistance’ ‘Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system’. The FCA deactivates when the driv- er cancels the system setting.
FORWARD COLLISION-AVOIDANCE ASSIST (FCA) SYSTEM (RADAR TYPE) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING — Forward Collision-
Avoidance Assist (FCA) Limitations
The FCA system is a supple- mental system and is not a sub- stitute for safe driving prac- tices. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and distance to the vehi- cle ahead to ensure it is safety to use the FCA system.
WARNING Take the following precautions when using the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system: This system is only a supple-
mental system and it is not intended to, nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driv- er. The sensing range and objects detectable by the sen- sors are limited. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.
NEVER drive too fast in accor- dance with the road condi- tions or while cornering.
Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sud- den situations from occur- ring. FCA does not stop the vehicle completely and does not avoid collisions.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 30
6 31
Driving your vehicle
The warning light illumi- nates on the LCD display, when you cancel the FCA system. It illuminates even
with the ESC (Electronic Stability Control) OFF. The driver can monitor the FCA ON/OFF status on the LCD display. When the warning light remains ON with the FCA activated, have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
The driver can select the initial warn- ing activation time in the User Settings in the instrument cluster LCD display. The options for the ini- tial Forward Collision Warning include the following:
EARLY — When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated earlier than normal. If the EARLY warning seems to be too sensitive, change it to NORMAL.
NORMAL — When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated nor- mally.
LATE — When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activat- ed later than normal. Select this condition only when traffic is light and you are driving at low speed.
Prerequisite for activation The FCA will activate when the FCA is selected on the LCD display, and when the following prerequisites are satisfied: — The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is activated. — The driving speed is over 6 mph.
(The FCA only works within a cer- tain range of vehicle speeds)
— When the FCA recognizes a vehi- cle in front.
WARNING The FCA may not recognize every obstacle or provide warn- ings and braking in every situa- tion, so do not rely on the FCA to stop the vehicle in instances where the driver sees an obsta- cle and has the ability to apply the brakes.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 31
Driving your vehicle
326
The FCA automatically activates when you turn the vehicle on. The driver can deactivate the FCA by canceling the system setting on the LCD display.
The FCA automatically deactivates when canceling the ESC.When the ESC is canceled, the FCA cannot be activated on the LCD display. In this case, the FCA warning light will illuminate, but it does not indi- cate a malfunction.
FCA warning message and system control The FCA produces warning mes- sages, warning alarms, and emer- gency braking based on the level of risk of a frontal collision, such as when a vehicle ahead suddenly brakes.
Forward Warning (1st warning)
The warning message appears on the LCD display with the warning.
WARNING Set or cancel FCA with control- ling switches on steering wheel after stopping the vehicle in a safe place.
OYB056050
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 32
6 33
Driving your vehicle
Collision Warning (2nd warning)
The warning message appears on the LCD display with the warning chime.
The vehicle will reduce its speed to a certain limit. — The brake activates gradually for
vehicles ahead. — The brake control activates within
an arranged limit to ease the impact from a collision.
Emergency braking (3rd warning)
The warning message appears on the LCD display with the warning chime.
The vehicle will reduce its speed to a certain limit. — The brake control activates within
an arranged limit to ease the impact from a collision. Maximum brake control is activated just before the collision.
Brake operation In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status for prompt reaction against the dri- vers depressing the brake pedal.
The FCA system provides addi- tional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.
The braking control is automatical- ly deactivated, when the driver sharply depresses the accelerator pedal, or when the driver abruptly turns the steering wheel.
The braking control is automatical- ly canceled when risk factors dis- appear.
OYB056051 OYB056073
CAUTION The driver should always exer- cise caution when operating the vehicle, even though there is no warning message or warning alarm.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 33
Driving your vehicle
346
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in front (front radar)
The sensor is to maintain a certain distance from the vehicle in front. However, a sensor covered or dirty with foreign substances, such as snow and rain, adversely affects the sensing performance. It may even temporarily cancel the FCA. Always keep the sensor clean.
Warning message and warning light
When the sensor is covered or dirty with foreign substances, such as snow or rain, the FCA operation may temporarily stop. In this case, a warning message will appear to noti- fy the driver. To operate the FCA again, remove the foreign substances.
OYB056063
OYB057090L
WARNING Never deliberately drive danger- ously to activate the system as such conduct increases the risk of an accident.
WARNING The FCA is a supplemental sys- tem and cannot completely stop the vehicle in all situations or avoid all collisions. It is the responsibility of the driver to safely drive and control the vehicle.
WARNING The FCA system assesses the risk of a collision by monitoring several variables, such as the distance to the vehicle ahead, the speed of the vehicle ahead, and the driver’s operation of the vehicle. Certain conditions such as inclement weather and road conditions may affect the operation of the FCA system.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/25/2018 12:08 PM Page 34
6 35
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE Do not install any accessories, such
as a license plate bracket or bumper sticker near the sensor area. Do not replace the bumper by yourself. Doing so may adverse- ly affect the sensing performance.
Always keep the sensor/bumper area clean.
Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Also, do not spray highly pressurized water on the sensor installed on the bumper.
Be careful not to apply unneces- sary force on the frontal sensor area. When the sensor moves out of the correct position due to external force, the system may not operate correctly even without the warning light or message. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued) Use only the genuine Kia sensor
cover. Do not apply paint on the sensor cover.
Do not remove or impact the radar components.
If the audio volume is too high, you may not be able to hear a warning alarm from the FCA sys- tem.
System malfunction When the FCA is not working prop-
erly, the FCA warning light ( ) will illuminate and the warning mes- sage (Check FCA system) will appear for a few seconds. After the message disappears, the master warning light ( ) will illuminate. In this case, have the vehicle inspect- ed by an authorized Kia dealer.
The FCA warning message may appear along with the illumination of the ESC warning light.
WARNING The FCA is only a supplemental system for the drivers conven- ience. It is the driver’s responsibility to control the vehicle. Do not sole- ly depend on the FCA system. Rather, maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to lower the driving speed.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 35
Driving your vehicle
366
Limitation of the system The FCA system is designed to mon- itor the vehicle ahead through radar signals to warn the driver that a colli- sion is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking. In certain situations, the radar sensor may not be able to detect the vehicle ahead. In these cases, the FCA system may not operate. The driver must pay careful attention in the following situ- ations where the FCA operation may be limited:
WARNING Due to sensing limitation, the
FCA may not produce warning messages or warning alarms in certain situations. Read the section Limitation of the sys- tem for more information.
When there is a malfunction with the FCA, the automatic braking control does not operate even with other brak- ing systems normally operat- ing.
The FCA system only recog- nizes vehicles in front of it while driving forward. It does not identify any animals or vehicles in the opposite direc- tion.
The FCA cannot recognize cross-traffic or parked vehi- cles presenting a side-profile.
(Continued)
(Continued) If the vehicle ahead suddenly
stops, there is a risk of colli- sion. The driver must always pay caution in case of danger- ous situations.
When the driver depresses the brake in a risk of collision, the FCA system may not oper- ate.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 36
6 37
Driving your vehicle
Recognizing vehicles — Sensor or sensor cover is contam-
inated with foreign substances. — It heavily rains or snows. — There is electromagnetic interfer-
ence. — Something in the path of travel
deflects the radar waves. — The vehicle in front has a narrow
body. (i.e. motorcycles) — The vehicle in front is a special
vehicle, such as a heavily-loaded truck or a trailer.
— The vehicle driving is unstable. — The radar sensor recognition is
limited. — Driving on unpaved and uneven
road surfaces, or through sudden gradient changes.
— In construction zones or on railroad tracks, or there are metallic objects on the road.
— Driving indoors such as in an underground parking lot.
— Entering a tunnel or tollgate. — There are materials which easily
reflect radar signals. (guardrails, approaching vehicles, etc.)
— Driving on a curve The FCA performance may be limit- ed while driving on a curve. The FCA may not recognize the vehicle in front even if in the same lane. It may pro- duce the warning message and the warning alarm prematurely, or it may not produce the warning message or the warning alarm at all. When driv- ing on a curve, exercise caution, maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.
OJF055025
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 37
Driving your vehicle
386
The FCA system may recognize a vehicle in an adjacent lane when driving on a curved road. In this case, the system may apply the brake. Always pay attention to road and driving conditions while driving. If necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance. Also, when necessary, you may depress the accelerator pedal to pre- vent the system from unnecessarily decelerating your vehicle. Always check the traffic conditions around the vehicle.
— Driving on a slope The FCA performance may be limit- ed while driving upward or downward on a slope, and may not recognize a vehicle in front in the same lane. It may produce the warning message and the warning alarm prematurely, or it may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all. When the FCA suddenly recognizes the vehicle in front while passing over a slope, you may experience sharp deceleration.
Always keep your eyes forward while driving upward or downward on a slope, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe dis- tance.
OJF055027OJF055026
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 38
6 39
Driving your vehicle
— Changing lanes When a vehicle changes lanes in front of you, the FCA system may not immediately detect the vehicle, espe- cially if the vehicle changes lanes abruptly. In this case, you must main- tain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.
When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the FCA sys- tem may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if nec- essary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.
— Recognizing the vehicle If the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance, addi- tional special attention is required. The FCA system may not be able to recognize the cargo extending from the vehicle. In these instances, you must maintain a safe braking dis- tance from the rearmost object, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.
OJF055030OJF055029OJF055028
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 39
Driving your vehicle
406
NOTICE In some instances, the FCA system may be canceled when subjected to electromagnetic interference.
WARNING — Testing the FCA
The FCA does not operate in certain situations. Thus, never test-operate the FCA against a vehicle or an object. It may cause a severe injury or even death.
WARNING — FCA and Towing
Cancel the FCA in the User Settings on the LCD display, before towing another vehicle. While towing, the brake applica- tion may adversely affect your vehicle safety.
WARNING Use extreme caution when the
vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance.
The FCA system is designed to detect and monitor the vehicle ahead through sensor recognition. It is not designed to detect bicycles, motorcy- cles, or smaller wheeled objects such as luggage bags, shopping carts, or strollers.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 40
6 41
Driving your vehicle
The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a constant speed without depressing the accelerator pedal. This system is designed to function above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). If the cruise control is left on, (CRUISE indicator light in the instru- ment cluster illuminated) the cruise control can be switched on acciden- tally. Keep the cruise control system off (CRUISE indicator light OFF) when the cruise control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed. Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather. Do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov- ered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads.
NOTICE During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approx- imately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.
To activate cruise control, depress the brake pedal at least once after turning the ignition switch to the ON position or starting the engine.
Cruise control switch
CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys- tem on or off.
CANCEL: Cancels cruise control operation.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con- trol speed.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING — Misuse of Cruise Control
Do not use cruise control if the traffic situation does not allow you to drive safely at a constant speed and with sufficient dis- tance to the vehicle in front.
OYB056016
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 41
Driving your vehicle
426
To set cruise control speed:
1.Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will illumi- nate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 20 mph (30 km/h).
3.Move the lever down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. The SET indicator light in the instru- ment cluster will illuminate. Release the accelerator pedal at the same time. The desired speed will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set speed:
Follow either of these procedures: Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Release the lever at the speed you want.
Move the lever up (to RES+) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1 mph (or 2km/h) each time you move the lever up (to RES+) in this manner.
OYB056018
OYB057033L
OYB057036L
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 42
6 43
Driving your vehicle
To decrease the cruising speed:
Follow either of these procedures: Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the lever at the speed you want to maintain.
Move the lever down (to SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1 mph (2 km/h) each time you move the lever down (to SET-) in this manner.
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on: If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control operation or change the set speed. To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
To cancel cruise control, do one of the following:
Depress the brake pedal. Shift into N (Neutral) with an
Automatic Transmission. Press the CANCEL button. Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 12 mph (20 km/h).
Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
OYB057033L OYB056030
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 43
Driving your vehicle
446
Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument clus- ter will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, move up the lever (to RES+) located on your steering wheel.You will return to your previously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h):
If any method other than the CRUISE button was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will automatically resume when you move the lever up (to RES+). It will not resume, however, if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
NOTICE Always check the road conditions before you move the lever up (to RES+) to resume the speed.
OYB057036L
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:31 PM Page 44
6 45
Driving your vehicle
To turn cruise control off, do one of the following:
Press the CRUISE button (the CRUISE indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off).
Turn the ignition off. Both of these actions cancel cruise control operation. If you want to resume cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in To set cruise control speed on the previous page.
OYB056018
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 45
Driving your vehicle
466
SPORT mode
The sport mode may be selected according to the drivers preference or road condition. The mode changes whenever the SPORT MODE button is pressed.
When normal mode is selected, it is not displayed on the cluster.
SPORT mode SPORT mode focuses on dynamic driving by auto- matically adjusting the steering wheel, engine and transmission system. When the SPORT
MODE button is pressed, the SPORT indicator (yellow or white) will illu- minate.
If the system is activat- ed: — While holding vehicle
speed, it maintains the gear and RPM for some time even though the accelerator pedal is not depressed.
— Up-shifting is delayed. When the SPORT mode
is activated, and the ignition switch is turned off and on it will change to NORMAL mode. To turn on the SPORT mode press SPORT MODE button again.
NOTICE In Sport drive mode, the fuel effi- ciency may decrease.
SPORT MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM
OSC057012N
NORMAL SPORT
SPORT
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 46
6 47
Driving your vehicle
Your vehicle’s fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving, where you drive and when you drive. Each of these factors affects how many miles (kilometers) you can get from a gallon (liter) of fuel.To operate your vehicle as economically as pos- sible, use the following driving sug- gestions to help save money in both fuel and repairs: Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don’t make «jack- rabbit» starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don’t race between stop- lights. Try to adjust your speed to the traffic so you don’t have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos- sible. Always maintain a safe dis- tance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.
Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.
Don’t «ride» the brake pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these com- ponents. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious con- sequences.
Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pres- sure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnec- essary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month.
Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper align- ment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption.
Keep your vehicle in good condi- tion. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, main- tain your vehicle in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 8. If you drive your vehicle in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see sec- tion 8 for details).
Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi- mum service, your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the vehicle. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion.
Travel lightly. Don’t carry unneces- sary weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces fuel economy.
Don’t let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you’re ready to go.
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 47
Driving your vehicle
486
Remember, your vehicle does not require extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm- up period.
Don’t lug or over-rev the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in a very high gear resulting in engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speed.
Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.
Open windows at high speeds can reduce fuel economy.
Fuel economy is reduced by cross- winds and headwinds. To help off- set some of this loss, slow down when driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for econ- omy and safety. Therefore, have an authorized Kia dealer perform scheduled inspections and mainte- nance.
WARNING — Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to coast down hills or anytime the vehicle is in motion. The power steering and power brakes will not function properly without the engine running. In addition, turning off the ignition while driving could engage the steer- ing wheel lock resulting in loss of vehicle steering. Keep the engine on and downshift to an appropriate gear for engine braking effect.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 48
6 49
Driving your vehicle
Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz- ards, follow these suggestions: Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking. Avoid sudden braking or steering. When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with a light up-and-down motion until the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS. If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow- ly to avoid spinning the drive wheels.
Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or other non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and any forward gear in vehicles equipped with an Automatic Transmission. Do not race the engine, and spin the wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possi- ble damage to the transmission. The ESC system should be turned OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
WARNING — Downshifting Do not downshift with an Automatic Transmission while driving on slippery surfaces. The sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid and result in an accident. CAUTION — Vehicle
rocking Prolonged rocking may cause engine overheating, transmis- sion damage or failure, and tire damage.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 49
Driving your vehicle
506
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight, here are some important tips to remember: Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi- cles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.
OBH058035L OMC035004
WARNING — Sudden vehicle movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehi- cle if people or objects are near- by. The vehicle may suddenly move forward or backwards as it becomes unstuck.
CAUTION — Spinning tires Do not spin the wheels, espe- cially at speeds more than 35 mph (56 km/h). Spinning the wheels at high speeds when the vehicle is stationary could cause a tire to overheat which could result in tire damage.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 50
6 51
Driving your vehicle
Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver’s head- lights.
Keep your headlights clean and properly aimed on vehicles not equipped with the automatic head- light aiming feature. Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night.
Avoid staring directly at the head- lights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous, especially if youre not prepared for the slick pavement. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain: A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis- tance needed to stop your vehicle, so slow down.
Keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape. Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.
If your tires are not in good condi- tion, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. Be sure your tires are in good shape.
Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you.
Driving too fast through large pud- dles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.
If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.
1JBB3303
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 51
Driving your vehicle
526
Driving in flooded areas Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly. Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be affected. After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them sev- eral times while the vehicle is moving slowly.
Driving off-road Drive carefully off-road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees. Become familiar with the off-road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving.
Highway driving Tires Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pres- sures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires. Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure. Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires.
WARNING — Tire tread Always check the tire tread before driving your vehicle. Worn-out tires can result in loss of vehicle control. Worn-out tires should be replaced as soon as possible. For further information and tread limits, refer to Tires and wheels in section 8.
WARNING — Under/Over Inflated Tires
Always check the tires for prop- er inflation before driving. Underinflated or overinflated tires can cause poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sud- den tire failure leading to acci- dents, injuries, and even death.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 52
6 53
Driving your vehicle
Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not for- get to check both the engine coolant and engine oil.
Drive belt A loose or damaged drive belt may overheat the engine.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 53
Driving your vehicle
546
Severe weather conditions in the winter result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize the problems of winter driving, you should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or Icy conditions To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is neces- sary to select tires equivalent in size and type of the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Furthermore, speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applica- tions, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids. Tire chains are not legal in all states. Check state laws before installing tire chains.
Snow tires If you mount snow tires on your vehi- cle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicles handling in all weather conditions. Keep in mind that the traction provid- ed by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle’s orig- inal equipment tires.You should drive cautiously even when the roads are clear. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations. Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and munic- ipal regulations for possible restric- tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
1JBB3305
WARNING — Snow tire size Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle’s standard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehi- cle may be adversely affected.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 54
6 55
Driving your vehicle
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of snow chains. Do not mount tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels; snow chains may cause damage to the wheels. If snow chains must be used, use wire-type chains with a thickness of less than 0.59 in (15 mm). Damage to your vehicle caused by improper snow chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer’s warranty.
Install tire chains only on the front tires.
The snow chain connecting hooks may be damaged from contacting vehicle components causing the snow chains to come loose from the tire. Make sure the snow chains are SAE class S certified. Always check chain installation for proper mounting after driving approximately 0.3 to 0.6 miles (0.5 to 1 km) to ensure safe mounting. Retighten or remount the chains if they are loose.
CAUTION — Snow chains Make sure the snow chains are
the correct size and type for your tires. Incorrect snow chains can cause damage to the vehicle body and suspen- sion and may not be covered by your vehicle manufacturer’s warranty.
Tire Chains for use on snow and ice may not be installed on P225/40R18 All Season tires. Use of chains with that tire size will damage your vehicle.
Even with the appropriate chain installed, do not make a full turn(turn the steering wheel fully to one side) when driving the vehicle. (If you are making a full turn, drive with the speed below 6.2 mph (10 km/h)).
OED050200
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 55
Driving your vehicle
566
Chain installation
When installing chains, follow the manufacturer’s instructions and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until it stops. Remove the chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads. When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning flashers and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle if available. Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing snow chains.
The use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
Do not exceed 20 mph (30 km/h) or the chain manufacturers recom- mended speed limit, whichever is lower.
Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking.
Use high quality ethylene gly- col coolant Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cool- ing system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in section 8. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.
Check battery and cables Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in section 8. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized Kia dealer or a service station.
CAUTION — Snow chains Chains that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can damage your vehicle’s brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
Stop driving and retighten the chains any time you hear them hitting the vehicle.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 56
6 57
Driving your vehicle
Change to «winter weight» oil if necessary In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity «winter weight» oil be used during cold weather. See section 9 for recommendations. If you aren’t sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Check spark plugs and igni- tion system Inspect your spark plugs as described in section 8 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heat- ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc- tions on the container. Window wash- er anti-freeze is available from an authorized Kia dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint fin- ish.
Don’t let your parking brake freeze Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to hap- pen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (Automatic Transmission) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.
Don’t let ice and snow accu- mulate underneath Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering com- ponents is not obstructed.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 57
Driving your vehicle
586
Carry emergency equipment Depending on the severity of the weather you should carry appropri- ate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a win- dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
TRAILER TOWING We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 58
6 59
Driving your vehicle
The label located on the driver’s door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight: 849 lbs. (385 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi- mum combined weight of occupants and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer, the combined weight includes the tongue load.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OSC067003N
OSC067004N
OSC067005N
OSC067006N
Tire and loading information label
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 59
Driving your vehicle
606
Seating capacity: Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons, Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry. However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed. Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity: We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity: The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit — 1.Locate the statement «The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.» on your vehicle’s plac- ard.
2.Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity. For example, if the «XXX» amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and lug- gage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5.Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calcu- lated in Step 4.
6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail- er, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehi- cle.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:32 PM Page 60
6 61
Driving your vehicle
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs
Weight (385 kg) Subtract Occupant
B Weight 805 lbs
161 lbs (73 kg) 5 (365 kg)
C Available Cargo and 44 lbs
Luggage weight (20 kg)
A B C
Example 3
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs
Weight (385 kg) Subtract Occupant
B Weight 750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) 5 (340 kg)
C Available Cargo and 99 lbs
Luggage weight (45 kg)
A B C
Example 2
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs
Weight (385 kg) Subtract Occupant
B Weight 300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) 2 (136 kg)
C Available Cargo and 549 lbs
Luggage weight (249 kg)
Example 1
A B C
Refer to your vehicles tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:33 PM Page 61
Driving your vehicle
626
Certification label
The certification label is located on the driver’s door sill at the center pil- lar. This label shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. This label also tells you the maxi- mum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle.Your dealer can help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the center- line.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed equipment your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle — like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driv- er or a passenger.
OEN056020
WARNING — Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight. Exceeding these ratings can affect your vehicles handling and braking ability.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:33 PM Page 62
6 63
Driving your vehicle
NOTICE Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be cov- ered by your warranty. Do not over- load your vehicle.
WARNING — Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle. Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehi- cle’s tires and possible tire fail- ure, increased stopping dis- tances and poor vehicle han- dling—all of which may result in a crash.
WARNING — Loose cargo Do not travel with unsecured blunt objects in the passenger compartment of your vehicle (e.g. suit cases or unsecured child seats). These items may strike occupant during a sud- den stop or crash.
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:33 PM Page 63
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capa- bility, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehi- cle design performance. Before load- ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determin- ing your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s specifications and the compliance label:
Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or option- al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your deal- er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight) This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) — including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the compliance label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight) This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passen- gers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the certification label located on the drivers door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT
6 64
Driving your vehicle
SC USA 6.QXP 7/18/2018 5:33 PM Page 64
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . 7-3 If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 7-3
If you have a flat tire while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 If the engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly . 7-4
If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 7-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
If the engine overheats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS — Type A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Low tire pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS — Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Low tire pressure telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Low tire pressure position telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Changing a tire with TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
If you have a flat tire (with spare tire). . . . . . . . . 7-18 Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
Removable towing hook (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 1
What to do in an emergency
27
ROAD WARNING Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exer- cise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer- gency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway. Depress the flasher switch with the ignition switch in any position. The flasher switch is located in the center console switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.
The hazard warning flasher oper- ates whether your vehicle is run- ning or not.
The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.
Care must be taken when using the hazard warning flasher while the vehicle is being towed.
OSC066002
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 2
7 3
What to do in an emergency
If the engine stalls at a cross- road or crossing If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, set the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while driving If a tire goes flat while you are driv- ing: 1. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immedi- ately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of con- trol. When the vehicle has slowed down to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traf- fic lanes.
2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flash- ers, set the parking brake and put the transmission in P (Automatic Transmission).
3. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.
4. When changing a flat tire, follow the instruction provided later in this section.
If engine stalls while driving 1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau- tiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Try to start the engine again. If
your vehicle will not start, contact an authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 3
What to do in an emergency
47
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START If the engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly 1. If your vehicle has an Automatic
Transmission, be sure the shift lever is in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you oper- ate the starter, the battery is dis- charged.
4. Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tight- ened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for Jump starting.
If engine turns over normally but does not start 1. Check fuel level. 2. With the ignition switch in the
LOCK position, check all connec- tors at the ignition coil and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call an authorized Kia dealer or seek other qualified assistance.
WARNING — Push/ pull start
Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Push or pull starting may cause the catalytic con- verter to overload and create a fire hazard.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 4
7 5
What to do in an emergency
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.
Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow these jump starting procedures. If in doubt, we strongly recommend that you have a competent technician or towing serv- ice jump start your vehicle.
CAUTION — 12 volt battery Use only a 12-volt jumper sys- tem. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24- volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set).
WARNING — Battery Keep all flames or sparks away from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which will explode if exposed to flame or sparks.
WARNING — Battery Never attempt to check the elec- trolyte level of the battery as this may cause the battery to rupture or explode.
WARNING — Frozen batteries
Do not attempt to jump start the vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low as the battery may rupture or explode.
WARNING — Sulfuric acid risk
When jump starting your vehicle be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the vehicle. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid.This is poi- sonous and highly corrosive.
1VQA4001
Discharged battery
Jumper Cables
Booster battery
(-)
(+)
(+) (-)
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 5
What to do in an emergency
67
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you will experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Automatic Transmission) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is com- ing out from underneath the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air condi- tioning had been in use, it is nor- mal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop).
5. If the water pump drive belt is bro- ken or engine coolant leaks, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to nor- mal.Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reser- voir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheat- ing. If overheating happens again, call an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING — Under the hood
While the engine is running, keep hair, hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts.
WARNING — Radiator cap Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.This can allow coolant to be blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 6
7 7
What to do in an emergency
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS — TYPE A)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator
Each tire, including the spare (if pro- vided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi- cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac- ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- sure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not oper- ating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi- nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminat- ed, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- ing the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi- cle that prevent the TPMS from func- tioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
OSC066001
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 7
What to do in an emergency
87
NOTICE If the TPMS indicator does not illu- minate for 3 seconds when the igni- tion switch is turned to the ON posi- tion or engine is running, or if it comes on after blinking for approxi- mately one minute, take your car to your nearest authorized Kia dealer and have the system checked.
Low tire pressure telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicator is illuminat- ed, one or more of your tires is sig- nificantly under-inflated. If the telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cor- nering and anticipate increased stop- ping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. Inflate the tires to the proper pres- sure as indicated on the vehicles placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the drivers side center pil- lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire. Then the Low Tire Pressure telltale may flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated after restarting and about 20 minutes of continuous driving before you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.
In winter or cold weather, the low tire pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure. When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the out- side temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire infla- tion pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pres- sure. When filling tires with more air, con- ditions to turn off the low tire pres- sure telltale may not be met. This is because a tire inflator has a margin of error in performance. The low tire pressure telltale will be turned off if the tire pressure is above the recom- mended tire inflation pressure.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 8
7 9
What to do in an emergency
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approxi- mately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. If the system is able to correctly detect an under inflation warning at the same time as system failure then it will illuminate the TPMS malfunction indicator. Have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible to determine the cause of the problem. The TPMS malfunction indicator may be illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power supply cables or radio transmitters such as at police stations, government and pub- lic offices, broadcasting stations, mil- itary installations, airports, or trans- mitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
The TPMS malfunction indicator may illuminate if snow chains or some separately purchased devices such as notebook computers, mobile charger, remote starter, navigation etc. are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
WARNING — Low pressure damage
Do not drive on low pressure tires. Significantly low tire pres- sure can cause the tires to over- heat and fail making the vehicle unstable resulting in increased braking distances and a loss of vehicle control.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 9
What to do in an emergency
107
Changing a tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire Pressure will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec- ommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure telltale will blink or remain on until the low pressure tire is repaired and placed on the vehicle. After you replace the low pressure tire with the TPMS spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure telltale may blink or illuminate after a few minutes because the TPMS sensor mounted on the spare wheel is not initiated. Once the low pressure tire is reinflat- ed to the recommended pressure and installed on the vehicle or the TPMS sensor mounted on the replaced spare wheel is initiated by an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tire pressure telltale will extinguish within a few minutes of driving. If the indicator is not extinguished after a few minutes of driving, please visit an authorized Kia dealer.
If an original mounted tire is replaced with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor on the replaced spare wheel should be initiated and the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel should be deactivated. If the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel locat- ed in the spare tire carrier still acti- vates, the tire pressure monitoring system may not operate properly. Have the tire with TPMS serviced or replaced by an authorized Kia deal- er.
CAUTION — Repair Agents Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by Kia to repair and/or inflate a low pres- sure tire. The tire sealant not approved by Kia may damage the tire pressure sensor.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 10
7 11
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able to identify a low tire by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure the tire’s inflation pressure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold. A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period. Allow the tire to cool before measur- ing the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure. The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris. If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradu- ally and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.
NOTICE Tampering with, modifying, or dis- abling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system’s ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunc- tions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) compo- nents may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and 2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 11
What to do in an emergency
127
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS — TYPE B, IF EQUIPPED)
(1) Low tire pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator
(2) Low tire pressure position telltale (Shown on the LCD display)
Check tire pressure
You can check the tire pressure in the information mode on the clus- ter. — Refer to User settings mode in
chapter 4. If tire pressure is not displayed
when the vehicle is stopped, Drive to display message displays. After driving, check the tire pressure.
You can change the tire pressure unit in the user settings mode on the cluster. — psi, kpa, bar (Refer to User set-
tings mode in chapter 4).
NOTICE The tire pressure may change due
to factors such as parking condi- tion, driving style, and altitude above sea level.
Low tire pressure warning may sound when a tires pressure unit is equal or higher than nearby tires. This is a normal occurrence, which is due to the change in tire pressure along with tire temperature.
OSC066001
OSC047138N
OSC047139N
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 12
7 13
What to do in an emergency
Each tire, including the spare (if pro- vided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi- cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac- ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres- sure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pres- sure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal- function indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximate- ly one minute and then remain con- tinuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehi- cle start-ups as long as the malfunc- tion exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter- nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 13
What to do in an emergency
147
NOTICE If the TPMS, Low Tire Pressure indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or engine is running, or if they remain illumi- nated after coming on for approxi- mately 3 seconds, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized Kia deal- er and have the system checked.
Low tire pressure telltale
Low tire pressure position tell- tale
When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illumi- nated, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the telltale illuminates, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cor- nering and anticipate increased stop- ping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres- sure as indicated on the vehicles placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the drivers side center pil- lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire. Then the TPMS malfunction indicator and the Low Tire Pressure telltale may turn on and illuminate after restarting and about 20 minutes of continuous driving before you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle. In winter or cold weather, the low tire pressure telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure.
OSC047139N
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 14
7 15
What to do in an emergency
When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pres- sure and adjust the tires to the recom- mended tire inflation pressure.
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction indicator
The low tire pressure telltale will illu- minate after it blinks for approximate- ly one minute when there is a prob- lem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. If the system is able to correctly detect an underinfla- tion warning at the same time as sys- tem failure then it will illuminate both the TPMS malfunction and low tire pressure position telltales e.g. if Front Left sensor fails, the TPMS malfunction indicator illuminates, but if the Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear Right tire is under-inflated, the low tire pressure position telltales may illuminate together with the TPMS malfunction indicator. Have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible to determine the cause of the problem.
The TPMS malfunction indicator may be illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power sup- ply cables or radios transmitters such as at police stations, govern- ment and public offices, broadcast- ing stations, military installations, airports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
The TPMS malfunction indicator may be illuminated if snow chains are used or some separate elec- tronic devices such as notebook computer, mobile charger, remote starter or navigation etc., are used in the vehicle. This can interfere with normal operation of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
WARNING — Low pressure damage
Do not drive on low pressure tires. Significantly low tire pres- sure can cause the tires to over- heat and fail making the vehicle unstable resulting in increased braking distances and a loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION When filling tires with more air, conditions to turn off the low tire pressure telltale may not be met. This is because a tire inflator has a margin of error in perform- ance. The low tire pressure tell- tale will be turned off if the tire pressure is above the recom- mended tire inflation pressure.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 15
What to do in an emergency
167
Changing a tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire Pressure telltale will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec- ommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.
Even if you replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire, the Low Tire Pressure telltale will remain on until the low pressure tire is repaired and placed on the vehicle. After you replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire, the TPMS malfunction indicator may illuminate after a few minutes because the TPMS sensor mounted on the spare wheel is not initiated. Once the low pressure tire is inflated again to the recommended pressure and installed on the vehicle or the TPMS sensor mounted on the replaced spare wheel is initiated by an authorized Kia dealer, the TPMS malfunction indicator and the low tire pressure telltale will turn off within a few minutes of driving. If the indicator has not disappeared after a few minutes of driving, please visit an authorized Kia dealer.
If an original mounted tire is replaced with the spare tire, the TPMS sensor on the replaced spare wheel should be initiated and the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel should be deactivated. If the TPMS sensor on the original mounted wheel located in the spare tire carrier still activates, the tire pressure monitoring system may not operate properly. Have the tire with TPMS serviced or replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION — Repair Agents Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by Kia to repair and/or inflate a low pres- sure tire. The sealant not approved by Kia may damage the tire pressure sensor.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 16
7 17
What to do in an emergency
You may not be able to identify a low tire by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure the tire’s inflation pressure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pressure measurement than a tire that is cold (from sitting station- ary for at least 3 hours and driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) during that 3 hour period). Allow the tire to cool before measur- ing the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure. A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period. Never use tire sealant if your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System. The liquid sealant can damage the tire pres- sure sensors.
The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.
If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes grad- ually and with light force, and slow- ly move to a safe position off the road.
NOTICE — Protecting TPMS Tampering with, modifying, or dis- abling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system’s ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunc- tions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) compo- nents may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and 2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired operation.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 17
What to do in an emergency
187
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH SPARE TIRE, IF EQUIPPED) Jack and tools
The spare tire, jack, jack handle and wheel lug nut wrench are stored in the luggage compartment.
Remove the luggage under tray out of the way to reach the equipment. (1) Jack handle (2) Jack (3) Wheel lug nut wrench
Jacking instructions The jack is provided for emergency tire changing only. To prevent the jack from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store it properly. Follow jacking instructions to reduce the possibility of personal injury.
WARNING — Changing tires
Never attempt vehicle repairs in the traffic lanes of a public road or highway.
OSC067007N
OYB066003
4 door
5 door
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 18
7 19
What to do in an emergency
Always move the vehicle completely off the road and onto the shoulder before trying to change a tire. The jack should be used on firm level ground. If you cannot find a firm level place off the road, call a towing serv- ice company for assistance. Be sure to use the correct front and rear jacking positions on the vehicle; never use the bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
Do not allow anyone to remain in the vehicle while it is on the jack. Make sure any children present are in a secure place away from the road and from the vehicle to be raised with the jack.
Removing and storing the spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt counterclockwise to remove the spare tire. Store the tire in the reverse order of removal. To prevent the spare tire and tools from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly.
WARNING — Tire Jack Do not place any portion of your body under a vehicle that is only supported by a jack since the vehicle can easily roll off the jack. Use vehicle support stands.
WARNING -Running vehi- cle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of the vehicle while the vehicle is on the jack as this may cause the vehicle to fall off the jack.
OQL065031
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 19
What to do in an emergency
207
If it is hard to loosen the tire hold- down wing bolt by hand, you can loosen it easily using the jack handle. 1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of
the tire hold-down wing bolt. 2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the jack handle.
Changing tires
1. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into P (Park) for Automatic Transmission.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash- ers.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, jack, jack handle, and spare tire from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the jack position.
OED066033
1JBA6504OQL065032
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 20
7 21
What to do in an emergency
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun- terclockwise one turn each, but do not remove any nut until the tire has been raised off the ground.
7. Place the jack at the front (1) or rear (2) jacking position closest to the tire you are changing. Place the jack at the designated loca- tions under the frame. The jacking positions are plates welded to the frame with two tabs and a raised dot to index with the jack.
OYB066004
WARNING — Changing a tire
To prevent vehicle movement while changing a tire, always set the parking brake fully, and always block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel being changed.
We recommend that the wheels of the vehicle be blocked, and that no person remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.
OYB066005
OYB066006
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 21
What to do in an emergency
227
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack and turn it clockwise, raising the vehicle until the tire just clears the ground. This measurement is approximately 1 in (30 mm). Before removing the wheel lug nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta- ble and that there is no chance for movement or slippage.
9. Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs.
Wheels and wheel covers may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible injury. Before put- ting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that prevents the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub.
WARNING — Jack location To reduce the possibility of injury, be sure to use only the jack provided with the vehicle in the correct jack position; never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
OYB066007
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 22
7 23
What to do in an emergency
10. To install the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.
11. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an exten- sion pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening every nut following the numerical sequence shown in the image until they are tight. Then double-check each nut for tight- ness. After changing the wheels, have an authorized Kia dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible. Wheel nut tightening torque: Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: 79 ~ 94 lbfft (11 ~ 13 kgfm)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. If the pressure is lower than recom- mended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the cor- rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible. After you have changed wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.
WARNING — Installing a wheel
Make sure the wheel makes good contact with the hub when installed. If the contact of the mounting surface between the wheel and hub is not good, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle. OYB066008
CAUTION When replacing the tires, after driving for about 30 miles (50 km), tighten the wheel nuts to check that there is no looseness. Recheck and tighten the wheel nuts again after driving for about 620 miles (1,000 km).
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 23
What to do in an emergency
247
Note that most lug nuts do not have metric threads. Be sure to use extreme care in checking for thread style before installing aftermarket lug nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
To prevent the jack, jack handle, wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire from rattling while the vehicle is in motion, store them properly. Check the inflation pressures as soon as possible after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, if necessary. Refer to Tires and wheels in section 8.
Important — use of compact spare tire (if equipped) Your vehicle is equipped with a com- pact spare tire. This compact spare tire takes up less space than a regu- lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a conventional tire and is designed for temporary use only. You should drive carefully when the compact spare is in use. The com- pact spare should be replaced by the proper conventional tire and rim at the first opportunity. The operation of this vehicle is not recommended with more than one compact spare tire in use at the same time.
CAUTION — Replacing lug nuts
Make certain during wheel removal that the same nuts that were removed are reinstalled — or, if replaced, that nuts with metric threads and the same chamfer configuration are used. Your vehicle has metric threads on the wheel studs and nuts. Installation of a non-metric thread nut on a metric stud will not secure the wheel to the hub properly and will damage the stud so that it must be replaced.
WARNING — Wheel studs Do not drive your vehicle with damaged wheel studs. If the studs are damaged, they may lose their ability to retain the wheel. This could lead to the loss of the wheel and a collision.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 24
7 25
What to do in an emergency
The compact spare should be inflat- ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
NOTICE Check the inflation pressure after installing the spare tire. Adjust it to the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire, observe the following precautions: Under no circumstances should you
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a higher speed could damage the tire.
Ensure that you drive slowly enough for the road conditions to avoid all hazards. Any road hazard, such as a pothole or debris, could seriously damage the compact spare.
Any continuous road use of this tire could result in tire failure, loss of vehicle control, and possible per- sonal injury.
Do not exceed the vehicles maxi- mum load rating or the load-carry- ing capacity shown on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.
Avoid driving over obstacles. The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a con- ventional tire and reduces the ground clearance approximately 1 inch (25 mm), which could result in damage to the vehicle.
Do not take this vehicle through an automatic car wash while the com- pact spare tire is installed.
Do not use tire chains on the com- pact spare tire. Because of the smaller size, a tire chain will not fit properly. This could damage the vehicle and result in loss of the chain.
The compact spare tire should not be installed on the front axle if the vehicle must be driven in snow or on ice.
WARNING — Spare tire Do not operate your vehicle on this compact spare at speeds over 50 mph (80 km/h). The compact spare tire is for emer- gency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced as soon as possible to avoid failure of the spare that may possibly lead to bodily injury or death.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 25
What to do in an emergency
267
Do not use the compact spare tire on any other vehicle because this tire has been designed especially for your vehicle.
The compact spare tires tread life is shorter than a regular tire. Inspect your compact spare tire regularly and replace worn com- pact spare tires with the same size and design, mounted on the same wheel.
The compact spare tire should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the compact spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other car compo- nents may occur.
Do not use more than one compact spare tire at a time.
Do not tow a trailer while the com- pact spare tire is installed.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 26
7 27
What to do in an emergency
Jack label 1. Model Name 2. Maximum allowable load 3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake. 4. When using the jack, stop the
engine. 5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack. 6. The designated locations under
the frame 7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical under the lifting point.
8. Move the shift lever to the P posi- tion on vehicles with Automatic Transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer 11. Production date 12. Representative company and
address
OHYK064001
OHYK064005
OHYK064002
Type A Example
Type B
Type C
The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 27
What to do in an emergency
287
TOWING Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a commer- cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are neces- sary to prevent damage to the vehi- cle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground. If any of the loaded wheels or sus- pension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels. When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.
CAUTION — Towing Do not tow the vehicle back-
wards with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment.
OMC045012
dolly
HXD02
HXD03
WARNING — Side and cur- tain air bag
If your vehicle is equipped with side and curtain air bag, set the ignition switch to LOCK or ACC position when the vehicle is being towed. The side and cur- tain air bag may deploy when the ignition is ON, and the rollover sensor detects the situ- ation as a rollover.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 28
7 29
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies : 1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position. 2. Place the transmission shift lever
in N (Neutral). 3. Release the parking brake.
Removable towing hook (front) (if equipped)
1. Remove the towing hook from the tool case located in the trunk/tail- gate.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the front bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.
Emergency towing
CAUTION — Towing gear position
Always place the transmission shift lever in N (Neutral) when towing your vehicle. Failure to place the transmission shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the trans- mission.
OSC067008N
OSC067009N
OSC067010N
Front
Rear (4 Door)
OYB066017
Rear (5 Door)
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 29
What to do in an emergency
307
If towing is necessary, we recom- mend you have it done by an authorized Kia dealer or a com- mercial tow truck service. If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency tow- ing hook under the front (or rear) of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes. Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition. Do not use the towing hooks to pull
a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.
Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than the vehicle doing the towing.
The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other fre- quently.
Attach a towing strap to the towing hook.
Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your vehicle.
Use only a cable or chain specifical- ly intended for use in towing vehi- cles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provided.
Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or dam- aged.
Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadily with even force.
To avoid damaging the hook, do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.
Use a towing strap less than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm) wide) in the middle of the strap for easy visibility.
Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loosened during tow- ing.
OYB066023
CAUTION Using a portion of the vehicle other than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your vehicle.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 30
7 31
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing precautions Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isnt locked. Place the transmission shift lever in
N (Neutral). Release the parking brake. Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will have reduced brake performance.
More steering effort will be required because the power steer- ing system will be disabled.
If you are driving down a long hill, the brakes may overheat and brake performance will be reduced. Stop often and let the brakes cool off.
If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transmission is in neutral. Be sure the steering is unlocked by plac- ing the ignition switch in the ACC position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes.
CAUTION — Automatic Transmission
To avoid serious damage to the Automatic Transmission, limit the vehicle speed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km/h) when towing.
Before towing, check for an Automatic Transmission fluid leak under your vehicle. If the Automatic Transmission fluid is leaking, a flatbed equipment or towing dolly must be used.
WARNING — Emergency Towing Precautions
Use extreme caution when tow- ing the vehicle. Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and towing cable or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.
If the disabled vehicle is unable to be moved, do not forcibly continue the towing. In this case, contact an authorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service for assistance.
Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.
Keep away from the vehicle during towing.
SC USA 7.qxp 7/18/2018 6:00 PM Page 31
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Owners responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Scheduled maintenance service precaution . . . . . . . . 8-9
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 8-15
Checking fluid levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26 Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28 Checking the parking brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29 Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37 For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Recharging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40 Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 8-40
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
8
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 1
Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Low aspect ratio tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55 Inner panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
Memory fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70 Bulb replacement precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
Light bulb position (front) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
Light bulb position (rear) (5 door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Light bulb position (rear) (4 door) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74
Light bulb position (side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Headlamp (Low/High beam) (Bulb type) bulb
replacement (Headlamp Type A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Side marker (front) (Bulb type) bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
Headlamp (Low/High beam) (Bulb type) bulb
replacement (Headlamp Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
Headlamp (Low/High beam) (LED type) bulb
replacement (Headlamp Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
Side marker (front) (LED type) bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
Position lamp + DRL (LED type) bulb replacement . 8-80
Daytime running lamp (Bulb type) bulb
replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
Side repeater lamp (LED type) bulb Replacement. 8-81
Side repeater lamp (bulb type) bulb Replacement . 8-82
Stop and tail lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door) . . 8-82
Rear turn signal lamp bulb replacement
(for 5 door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement
(for 5 door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85
Back-up lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door). . . . . . 8-85
Tail lamp (inside) bulb replacement (for 5 door) . . . 8-86
Side marker (rear) (Bulb type) bulb replacement
(Rear combination lamp Type A) (for 5 door) . . . . 8-87
Side marker (rear) (LED type) bulb replacement
(Rear combination lamp Type B) (for 5 door) . . . . 8-88
High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement
(for 5 door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
License plate lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89
Rear turn signal lamp bulb replacement
(for 4 door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89
Stop and tail lamp / Side marker (Bulb type)
replacement (for 4 door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-90
8
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 2
Side marker (rear) (LED type) bulb replacement
(Rear combination lamp Type B) (for 4 door) . . . . 8-91
Back-up lamp bulb replacement (for 4 door). . . . . . 8-92
Tail lamp (Bulb type) bulb replacement
(for 4 door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement
(for 4 door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-93
High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement
(for 4 door). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94
Trunk lamp bulb replacement (for 4 door) . . . . . . . 8-94
Map lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96
Room lamp bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96
Glove box lamp bulb replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
Tailgate room lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door) . 8-98
Appearance care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99 Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-107 Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-107
Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system . . . . 8-107
Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108
California perchlorate notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110
8
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 3
Maintenance
48
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OSC077013N
Gamma 1.6L GDI Engine (Gasoline)
The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake / clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10.Windshield washer fluid reservoir
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 4
8 5
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever per- forming any maintenance or inspec- tion procedures. Should you have any doubts con- cerning the inspection or servicing of your vehicle, we strongly recom- mend that you have an authorized Kia dealer perform this work. An authorized Kia dealer has factory- trained technicians and genuine Kia parts to service your vehicle proper- ly. For expert advice and quality serv- ice, see an authorized Kia dealer. Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi- cient servicing may result in opera- tional problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury.
Owners responsibility
NOTICE Maintenance Service and Record Retention are the owner’s responsi- bility. You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accor- dance with the scheduled mainte- nance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this infor- mation to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle war- ranties. Detailed warranty information is provided in your Warranty & Consumer Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered. We recommend you have your vehi- cle maintained and repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. An authorized Kia dealer meets Kias high service quality standards and receives tech- nical support from Kia in order to pro- vide you with a high level of service satisfaction.
NOTICE — NHTSA Safety Corrosion Alert
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) has issued a general warning to all vehi- cle owners of all brands regarding the risks associated with vehicle underbody corrosion. From your initial purchase, take the following steps to prevent unsafe corrosion damage to your vehicle:
(Continued)
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 5
Maintenance
68
(Continued) Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the win- ter and whenever your vehicle has been exposed to such salts or chemicals.
Do a thorough washing of the undercarriage at the end of the winter.
Use professional service techni- cians or governmental inspection stations to annually inspect for corrosion.
Immediately seek an inspection of your vehicle if you become visual- ly aware of corrosion flaking or scaling or if you become aware of a change in vehicle performance, such as soft or spongy brakes, flu- ids leaking, impairment of direc- tional control, suspension noises or rattling metal straps. NHTSA further advises that after a vehicle is 7 years old, it is essen- tial that you take these indicated maintenance steps to ensure that you protect yourself from unsafe corrosion conditions.
Owner maintenance precau- tions Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform. As explained earlier in this section, several procedures can be done only by an authorized Kia dealer with spe- cial tools.
NOTICE Improper owner maintenance dur- ing the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Warranty & Consumer Information manual provided with the vehicle. If you’re unsure about any servicing or maintenance proce- dure, have it done by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING — Maintenance work
Do not wear jewelry or loose clothing while working under the hood of your vehicle with the engine running. These can become entangled in moving parts, if you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fans.
WARNING — Touching metal parts
Do not touch metal parts (including strut bars) while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so could result in serious personal injury. Turn the engine off and wait until the metal parts cool down to perform mainte- nance work on the vehicle.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 6
8 7
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be per- formed by the owner or an author- ized Kia dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehi- cle. Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your deal- er as soon as possible. These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by war- ranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule When you stop for fuel: Check the engine oil level. Check the coolant level in coolant
reservoir. Check the windshield washer fluid
level. Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle: Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steer- ing effort or looseness in the steer- ing wheel, or change in its straight- ahead position.
Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or pulls to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.
When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or hard-to-push brake pedal.
If any slipping or changes in the operation of your transmission occurs, check the transmission fluid level.
Check the automatic transmission P (Park) function.
Check the parking brake.
WARNING — Hot coolant Be careful when checking your engine coolant level when the engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 7
Maintenance
88
Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).
At least monthly: Check the coolant level in the
engine coolant reservoir. Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn signals and hazard warning flash- ers.
Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare for tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.
Check for loose wheel lug nuts.
At least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall) : Check the radiator, heater and air
conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
Check the windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean the wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.
Check the headlight alignment. Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps. Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
At least once a year : Clean the body and door drain
holes. Lubricate the door hinges and
check the hood hinges. Lubricate the door and hood locks
and latches. Lubricate the door rubber weather-
strips. Check the air conditioning system. Inspect and lubricate automatic
transmission linkage and controls. Clean the battery and terminals. Check the brake/clutch fluid level.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 8
8 9
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE Scheduled maintenance service precaution Follow the Normal Maintenance Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions. Repeated driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in
freezing temperature Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather Driving in heavy dust condition Driving in heavy traffic area Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly Towing a trailer or using a camper, or roof rack Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h) Frequently driving in stop-and-go condition If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After 120 months or 150,000 miles continue to follow the prescribed main- tenance intervals.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 9
Maintenance
108
Normal Maintenance Schedule — Non Turbo Models The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 Miles1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 Km1,000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Drive belts *1 At first, inspect at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months, after that, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months
Engine oil and engine oil filter
Gamma 1.6L GDI R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Fuel additives *2 Add every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months
Air cleaner filter I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I
Spark plugs Gamma 1.6L GDI Replace every 97,500 miles (156,000 km)
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE ITEM
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change. *1 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced. *2 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 10
8 11
Maintenance
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 Miles1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 Km1,000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Valve clearance *3 Gamma 1.6L GDI
Inspect every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
Rotate tires Rotate every 6,000 miles (10,000 km)
Climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit)
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Vacuum hose I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Coolant (Engine) At first, replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years,
after that, replace every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
Battery condition I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Brake discs and pads I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Drive shaft and boots — I — I — I — I — I — I — I —
Suspension ball joints and mounting bolts
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Normal Maintenance Schedule — Non Turbo Models(CONT.)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change. *3 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. Have an authorized Kia dealer perform the
operation.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 11
Maintenance
128
Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 Miles1,000 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 Km1,000 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180
Air conditioner compressor/refrigerant I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Exhaust system I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Cooling system — — — I — I — I — I — I — I —
Automatic transmission fluid No check, No service required
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap — I — I — I — I — I — I — I —
Fuel tank air filter *4 — I — I — I — I — I — I — I —
Fuel lines, hoses and connections — — — I — — — I — — — I — — —
Parking brake — I — I — I — I — I — I — I —
Brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid — I — I — I — I — I — I — I —
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE ITEM
Normal Maintenance Schedule — Non Turbo Models (CONT.)
I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R : Replace or change. *4 : Fuel tank air filter is considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended as the level of maintenance
will be dependent upon the quality fuel used in the vehicle.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 12
8 13
Maintenance
Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions — Non Turbo Models The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals. R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE
OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDITION
Engine oil and engine oil filter
Gamma 1.6L GDI R Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km)
or 6 months A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter R More frequently C, E
Spark plugs R More frequently A, B, F, G, H, I, K
Automatic transmission fluid R Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Brake discs and pads, calipers and rotors I More frequently C, D, E, G, H
Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H
Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I More frequently C, D, E, F, G
Suspension ball joints and mounting bolts I More frequently C, D, E, F, G
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 13
Maintenance
148
Severe driving conditions A-Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km)
in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freez- ing temperature
B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis- tances
C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roads
D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather
E-Driving in heavy dust condition
F — Driving in heavy traffic area
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road repeatedly
H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing
J — Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K- Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE
OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING CONDITION
Drive shafts and boots I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter (for evaporator and blower unit) R More frequently C, E, G
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 14
8 15
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS Engine oil and filter The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is being driven in severe con- ditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.
Drive belts Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked peri- odically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.
Fuel filter (for gasoline) Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped a lifetime fuel filter that integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed but depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, fuel filter inspection or replace is needed. The fuel filter be Inspected or replaced by an authorized Kia dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con- nections Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and dam- age. Have an authorized Kia dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at the intervals specified in the maintenance sched- ule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is installed correctly.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 15
Maintenance
168
Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- dence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterio- ration. Particular attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in con- tact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are pres- ent. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.
Air cleaner filter A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is rec- ommended when the filter is replaced.
Spark plugs Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.
Valve clearance (if equipped) Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if neces- sary. An authorized Kia dealer should perform the operation.
Cooling system Check the cooling system compo- nents, such as the radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Coolant The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the mainte- nance schedule.
Automatic transmission fluid Automatic transmission fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions. But in severe conditions, the fluid should be changed at an authorized Kia dealer in accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the begin- ning of this chapter.
NOTICE Automatic transmission fluid color is basically red. As the vehicle is driven, the auto- matic transmission fluid will begin to look darker. It is normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 16
8 17
Maintenance
Brake hoses and lines Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorat- ed or damaged parts immediately.
NOTICE — NHTSA Safety Corrosion Alert
NHTSA has warned all vehicle own- ers of all brands that they must main- tain their vehicles in a manner which will prevent brake hose and brake line failures due to corrosion when such vehicles are exposed to winter road salt and related chemicals. While seri- ous corrosion conditions typically only manifest themselves as safety issues after 7 years of vehicle use, the corro- sion process starts immediately and thus underbody cleaning maintenance must commence from your vehicle’s first exposure to road salts and chem- icals. NHTSA urges vehicle owners to take the following steps to prevent corrosion:
(Continued)
CAUTION Use only specified automatic transmission fluid. The use of a non-specified fluid could result in a transmission malfunction and failure. (Refer to «Recommended lubricants and capacities» in chapter 9.)
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 17
Maintenance
188
(Continued) 1. Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly throughout the winter and do a thorough washing in the spring to remove road salt and other de-icing chemicals.
2. Monitor the brake system for signs of corrosion by having regu- lar professional inspections and watching for signs of problems, including loss of brake fluid, unusual leaks and soft or spongy feel in the brake pedal.
3. Replace the entire brake pipe assembly if you find severe corro- sion that causes scaling or flaking of brake components.
Brake/Clutch fluid Check the brake/clutch fluid level in the brake/clutch fluid reservoir. The level should be between MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake/clutch fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Parking brake Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables.
Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.
Exhaust pipe and muffler Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, dete- rioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con- nections or replace parts as neces- sary.
Suspension mounting bolts Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 18
8 19
Maintenance
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or dam- age. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.
Drive shafts and boots Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 19
Maintenance
208
CHECKING FLUID LEVELS When checking engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid, always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant or fluid. This is espe- cially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 20
8 21
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating tempera- ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and reinsert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine com- ponents.
Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities in chapter 9.)
CAUTION — Replacing engine oil
Do not overfill the engine oil. It may damage the engine.
WARNING — Radiator hose Be very careful not to touch the radiator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you.
OSC077015N
Gamma 1.6L GDI Engine (Gasoline)
OSC077014N
Gamma 1.6L GDI Engine (Gasoline)
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 21
Maintenance
228
Changing the engine oil and filter Have engine oil and filter changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.
WARNING — Used engine oil
Used engine oil may cause irrita- tion or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for pro- longed periods of time. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 22
8 23
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory. Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year: at the beginning of the winter season, and before traveling to a colder cli- mate.
Checking the coolant level Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cool- ing system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.
Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may still blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.
WARNING Removing radiator cap
Never attempt to remove the radiator cap while the engine is operating or hot. Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine damage and could result in serious personal injury from escaping hot coolant or steam.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 23
Maintenance
248
Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses. The coolant level should be filled between F and L marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool. If the coolant level is low, add enough specified coolant to provide protec- tion against freezing and corrosion. Bring the level to F, but do not over- fill. If frequent additions are required, see an authorized Kia dealer for a cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant When adding coolant, use only
deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the fac- tory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage.
The engine in your vehicle has alu- minum engine parts and must be protected by an ethylene-glycol with phosphate based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing.
DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the spec- ified coolant.
Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze. This would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.
NOTICE Make sure that the coolant cap is properly closed after refilling the coolant. Otherwise the engine could overheat while driving.
OSC077016N
WARNING — Cooling fan
Use caution when working near the blade of the cooling fan.The electric motor (cooling fan) is controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pres- sure and vehicle speed. it may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 24
8 25
Maintenance
For mixture percentage, refer to the following table.
Changing the coolant Have the coolant changed by an authorized Kia dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.
OSC077017N
Ambient Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze Water 5F (-15C) 35 65
-13F (-25C) 40 60
-31F (-35C) 50 50
-49F (-45C) 60 40
WARNING Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure which may result in serious injury.
CAUTION Put a thick cloth or fabric around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in order to prevent the coolant from over- flowing into engine parts such as the alternator.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 25
Maintenance
268
BRAKE/CLUTCH FLUID (IF EQUIPPED) Checking the brake/clutch fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX (Maximum) and MIN (Minimum) marks on the side of the reservoir. Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX (Maximum) level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of brake linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake system checked by an author- ized Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch fluid. (Refer to Recommended lubri- cants and capacities in chapter 9.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
In the event the brake system requires frequent additions of fluid, the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. When changing and adding brake/clutch fluid, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake/clutch fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible.
Brake/clutch fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.
OYB076013 CAUTION — Brake/clutch
fluid Do not allow brake/clutch fluid to contact the vehicle’s body paint, as paint damage will result.
CAUTION — Proper fluid Only use brake/clutch fluid in brake system. Small amounts of improper fluids (such as engine oil) can cause damage to the brake system.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 26
8 27
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID Checking the washer fluid level
The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick visual inspection. Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces- sary. In warm climate, plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer sol- vent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.
WARNING — Flammable fluid
Do not allow the washer fluid to come in contact with open flames or sparks.The windshield washer fluid reservoir is flamma- ble under certain circumstances. This can result in a fire.
WARNING — Windshield fluid
Do not drink the windshield washer fluid. The windshield washer fluid is poisonous to humans and animals.
WARNING — Coolant Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.
Radiator coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control.
OSC077019N
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 27
Maintenance
288
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking brake by counting the number of clicks heard while fully applying it from the released position. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, have the parking brake adjusted by an authorized Kia dealer.
Stroke : 5~7 clicks at a force of 44 lbs (20 kg, 196 N).
PARKING BRAKE
OYB076016
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 28
8 29
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary, and should not be washed. You can clean the filter when inspect- ing the air cleaner compartment. Clean the filter by using compressed air.
1. Loosen the air cleaner cover attaching clips and open the cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner. 3. Replace the air cleaner filter. 4. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
OYB076018
OYB076020 OYB076021
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 29
Maintenance
308
Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in extreme- ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals. (Refer to Maintenance under severe usage conditions in this chapter.)
CAUTION — Air filter maintenance
Do not drive with the air clean- er removed; this will result in excessive engine wear.
When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result.
Use a Kia genuine part. Use of a non-genuine part could damage the air flow sensor.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 30
8 31
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER Filter inspection The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier. When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the fol- lowing procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.
1. Open the glove box and remove the stoppers on both sides.
2. With the glove box open, pull the support strap (1).
OYB076023OYB076022
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 31
Maintenance
328
3. Remove the climate control air fil- ter cover while pressing the lock on the both sides of the cover.
4. Replace the climate control air fil- ter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
When replacing the climate control air filter install it properly. Otherwise, the system may produce noise and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced.
OSC076007 OQL075021
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 32
8 33
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES Blade inspection
Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield diffi- cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind- shield or the wiper blades with for- eign matter can reduce the effective- ness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commer- cial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the win- dow and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement. To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually. Aftermarket wiper blades may result in wiper malfunction and/or failure. It is recommended to use certified Kia parts.
1JBA5122 CAUTION — Wiper blades To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 6:07 PM Page 33
Maintenance
348
Front windshield wiper blade
Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.
2. Compress the clip (1) and slide the blade assembly downward (2).
3. Lift it off the arm. 4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
1LDA5023
CAUTION — Wiper arms Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.
1JBA7037
1JBA7038
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:54 PM Page 34
8 35
Maintenance
Type B
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull down the blade assembly and remove it.
3. Install the new blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.
Rear window wiper blade (for 5 door)
1. Raise the wiper arm and pull out the wiper blade assembly.
OHM078059
OHM078060
OHM078061
OHM078062
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 35
Maintenance
368
2. Install the new blade assembly by inserting the center part into the slot in the wiper arm until it clicks into place.
3. Make sure the blade assembly is installed firmly by trying to pull it slightly.
To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized Kia dealer replace the wiper blade.
OHM078063
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 36
8 37
Maintenance
BATTERY For best battery service
Keep the battery securely mount- ed.
Keep the battery top clean and dry. Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.
If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, discon- nect the battery cables.
Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery. If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi- ate medical attention. If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel pain or burning sensation, get medical attention imme- diately.
An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation. The battery contains lead. Do not dispose of it after use. Please return the battery to an authorized Kia dealer to be recycled.
Never attempt to recharge the bat- tery when the battery cables are con- nected.
WARNING — Risk of explosion
Keep lit cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery. The battery contains hydrogen — a highly combustible gas which will explode if it comes in contact with a flame or spark. Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries con- tain highly corrosive SULFURIC ACID and electrolytes. Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish. Wear eye protection when charging or work- ing near a battery. Always provide ventila- tion when working in an enclosed space.
OYB076025
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 37
Maintenance
388
NOTICE If you connect unauthorized elec- tronic devices to the battery, the bat- tery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices.
Recharging the battery Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery. If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam- ple, the headlamps or interior lamps were left on while the vehi- cle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours.
WARNING — Risk of elec- trocution
Never touch the electrical igni- tion system while the vehicle is running. This system works with high voltage which can shock you.
WARNING — Recharging Battery
Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected.
WARNING — Battery lead compound
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 38
8 39
Maintenance
When recharging the battery, observe the following precautions: The battery must be removed from
the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation.
Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or flame near the battery.
Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 120F (49C).
Wear eye protection when check- ing the battery during charging.
Disconnect the battery charger in the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.
Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine.
The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected.
Reset items The following items should be reset after the battery has been dis- charged or the battery has been dis- connected. Auto up/down window Sunroof Trip computer Climate control system
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 39
Maintenance
408
TIRES AND WHEELS Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla- tion pressures All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. Cold Tires means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, top vehi- cle handling, and minimum tire wear. For recommended inflation pressure refer to Tire and wheels in chapter 9.
All specifications (sizes and pres- sures) can be found on a label attached to the drivers side center pillar.
OUB071018
WARNING — Checking the tire inflation
pressure Inflate your tires consistent with the instructions provided in this manual. Regularly check the tire infla- tion pressure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to observe this pre- caution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pres- sures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle’s driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 40
8 41
Maintenance
Underinflation also results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy. Wheel deformation also is possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater pos- sibility of damage from road haz- ards.
Warm tires normally exceed rec- ommended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be underinflated.
Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.
Tire pressure Always observe the following: Check tire pressure when the tires
are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn’t been driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) since startup.)
Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pres- sure of other tires.
Never overload your vehicle. Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one.
Checking tire inflation pres- sure Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
How to check Use a good quality gauge to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. — «Cold» means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
WARNING — Tire Inflation Overinflation or underinflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure. This could result in loss of vehicle control and potential injury.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 41
Maintenance
428
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm- ly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjust- ment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the rec- ommended amount. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and mois- ture.
Inspect your tires frequently for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tire pres- sure gauge.
Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle con- trol, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the driver’s side center pillar.
Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire. Kia recommends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.
Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recom- mended that the tires be rotated every 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or sooner if irregular wear develops. During rotation, check the tires for correct balance. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pres- sure, improper wheel alignment, out- of-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness. Refer to Tire and wheels in chapter 9.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 42
8 43
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated. Rotate radial tires that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left.
Wheel alignment and tire bal- ance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
WARNING — Mixing tires Do not use the compact spare
tire (if equipped) for tire rota- tion.
Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circum- stances. This may cause unusual handling characteris- tics.
CAUTION — Wheel weight Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle’s alu- minum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.
S2BLA790A
CBGQ0707A
Without a spare tire
Directional tires (if equipped)
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 43
Maintenance
448
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear Indicator (A) will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens. Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replac- ing the tire.
The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. The tire size affects wheel speed. When replacing tires, all 4 tires must use the same size originally supplied with the vehi- cle. Using tires of a different size can cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) and ESC (Electronic Stability Control) to work irregularly.
NOTICE We recommend that when replac-
ing tires, use the same which were originally supplied with the vehi- cle. If not, driving performance could be altered.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possi- ble, or necessary, then replace the two front or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can serious- ly affect your vehicle’s handling.
Compact spare tire replacement A compact spare tire has a shorter tread life than a regular size tire. Replace it when you can see the tread wear indicator bars on the tire. The replacement compact spare tire should be the same size and design tire as the one provided with your new vehicle and should be mounted on the same compact spare tire wheel. The compact spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular size wheel, and the compact spare tire wheel is not designed for mount- ing a regular size tire.
OUM076204L
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 44
8 45
Maintenance
Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset. A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clear- ance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer calibra- tion, headlight aim and bumper height.
Tire traction Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. Slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road, to reduce the possibility of losing con- trol of the vehicle.
Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and describes the fundamental charac- teristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or Brand name is shown.
CAUTION — Wheel Wheels that do not meet Kia’s specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle or unusual handling and poor vehicle control.
OJF085008L
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 45
Maintenance
468
2. Tire size designation A tires sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replace- ment tires for your car. The following explains what the letters and num- bers in the tire size designation mean. Example tire size designation: (These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designa- tor could vary depending on your vehicle.) P205/55R16 89H
P — Applicable vehicle type (tires marked with the prefix P are intended for use on passenger vehicles or light trucks; however, not all tires have this marking).
205 — Tire width in millimeters. 55 — Aspect ratio. The tires section
height as a percentage of its width.
R — Tire construction code (Radial). 16 — Rim diameter in inches.
89 — Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.
H — Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor- tant information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The follow- ing explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designa- tion mean.
Example wheel size designation: 6.0JX16
6.0 — Rim width in inches. J — Rim contour designation. 16 — Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif- ferent speed ratings currently being used for passenger vehicles. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire’s designed maximum safe oper- ating speed.
S 112 mph (180 km/h) T 118 mph (190 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed Speed Rating Symbol
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 46
8 47
Maintenance
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date, (including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of num- bers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufactur- ing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four num- bers indicate week and year manu- factured. For example: DOT XXXX XXXX 1618 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week of 2018.
4. Tire ply composition and mate- rial
The number of layers or plies of rub- ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter «R» means radial ply con- struction; the letter «D» means diago- nal or bias ply construction; and the letter «B» means belted-bias ply con- struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum per- missible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.
6. Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maxi- mum section width. For example: TREADWEAR 440 TRACTION A TEMPERATURE A
WARNING — Tire age Replace tires within the recom- mended time frame. Failure to replace tires as recommended can result in sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an accident.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 47
Maintenance
488
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified govern- ment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a- half times (1) as well on the gov- ernment course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, we recom- mend that tires be replaced after approximately six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. These grades are molded on the side-walls of passenger vehicle tires. The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicles may vary with respect to grade.
Traction — AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on spec- ified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perform- ance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brak- ing traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- acteristics.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 48
8 49
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi- tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C cor- responds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labora- tory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Tire terminology and definitions Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in kilopascal (kPa) or pounds per square inch (psi). Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight of optional acces- sories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmis- sion, power seats, and air condition- ing. Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to its width. Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in kilopascals (kPa) or pounds per square inch (psi) before a tire has built up heat from driving. Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo. DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des- ignator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 49
Maintenance
508
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Front Axle. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the Rear axle. Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure. Light truck(LT) tire: A tire designat- ed by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corre- sponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Load ratings: The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maxi- mum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the maximum per- missible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight. Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs. (68kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions. Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical tire that has a par- ticular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall. Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles. Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords Pneumatic tire: A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automo- tive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 50
8 51
Maintenance
Production options weight: The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb.(2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previ- ously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim. Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle manufacturer’s recommend- ed tire inflation pressure and shown on the tire placard. Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seat- ed. Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction: The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes called «wear bars,» that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of tread remains. UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards, a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, tempera- ture and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing proce- dures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num- ber of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight. Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occu- pant weight and driving by 2. Vehicle Placard: A label permanent- ly attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and rec- ommended inflation pressure.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 51
Maintenance
528
All season tires Kia specifies all season tires on some models to provide good per- formance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road condi- tions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires Kia specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior perform- ance on dry roads. Summer tire per- formance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom- mends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; other- wise, poor handling may result. Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the stan- dard tires on the tire label on the dri- ver’s side of the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires.
WARNING Do not use summer tires at tem- peratures below 45F (7C) or when driving on snow or ice. At temperatures below 45F (7C), summer tires can lose elastici- ty, and therefore traction and braking power as well. Change the tires on your vehicle to win- ter or all-weather tires of the same size as the standard tires of the vehicle. Both types of tires are identified by the M+S (Mud and Snow) marking. Using summer tires at very cold tem- peratures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires permanently.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 52
8 53
Maintenance
Tire chains Tire chains, if necessary, should be installed on the front wheels. Be sure that the chains are installed in accordance with the manufactur- er’s instructions. To minimize tire and chain wear, do not continue to use tire chains when they are no longer needed. When driving on roads covered
with snow or ice, drive at less than 20 mph (30 km/h).
Use the SAE S class or wire chains.
If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to avoid contact with the vehicle body.
To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels. In unavoidable circumstances, use a wire type chain.
Use wire chains less than 0.47 inches (12 mm) to prevent damage to the chains connection.
Radial-ply tires Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radi- al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction and are select- ed to complement the ride and han- dling characteristics of your vehicle. Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combina- tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to fol- low is: identical radial-ply tires should always be used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval shown in this section to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 53
Maintenance
548
Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped) Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks. Because the low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and brak- ing, it may be more uncomfortable to ride in and there is more noise com- pare with normal tires.
It is not easy to recognize the tire damage with your own eyes. In the event that the tire is impacted, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leakage from the tire.
If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.
You can find out the tire information on the tire sidewall.
CAUTION Because the sidewall of the low aspect ratio tire is shorter than the normal, the wheel and tire of the low aspect ratio tire is easi- er to be damaged. So, follow the instructions below. When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driv- ing, inspect tires and wheels.
When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not dam- aged.
If the tire is impacted, we rec- ommend that you inspect the tire condition or contact an authorized Kia dealer.
To prevent damage to the tire, inspect the tire condition and pressure every 1,900 miles (3,000 km).
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 54
8 55
Maintenance
FUSES
Left side : Normal , Right side : Blown
A vehicles electrical system is pro- tected from electrical overload dam- age by fuses. This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the drivers side panel bolster, the other in the engine com- partment near the battery. If any of your vehicles lights, acces- sories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will melt. If the electrical system does not work, first check the drivers side fuse panel. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating. If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and imme- diately consult an authorized Kia dealer. Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, car- tridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.
WARNING — Fuse replace- ment
Never replace a fuse with any- thing but another fuse of the same rating.
A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire.
Never install a wire or alu- minum foil instead of the proper fuse — even as a tem- porary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire.
Do not modify or add-on elec- tric wiring to the vehicle.
CAUTION Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.
OJF075021
Blade type
Cartridge type
Multi fuse
BFT
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 55
Maintenance
568
NOTICE When replacing fuse, turn the
ignition OFF and turn off switches of all electrical devices then remove battery (-) terminal.
The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items.
WARNING — Electrical Fire Always ensure replacements fuses and relays are securely fastened when installed. Failure to do so can result in a vehicle fire.
CAUTION When replacing a blown fuse
or relay, make sure the new fuse or relay fits tightly into the clips. Failure to tightly install the fuse or relay may cause damage to the wiring and electric systems.
Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts.The fuses, relays and terminals may not be fas- tened correctly which may cause vehicle damage.
CAUTION Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into fuse/relay terminals such as a driver or wiring. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction.
Do not plug in screwdrivers or aftermarket wiring into the ter- minal originally designed for fuse and relays only. The elec- trical system and wiring of the vehicle interior may be dam- aged or burned due to contact failure.
If you directly connect the wire on the taillight or replace the bulb which is over the reg- ulated capacity to install trail- ers etc., the inner junction block can get burned.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 56
8 57
Maintenance
Inner panel fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover. If the switch is located in the OFF position, a caution indicator will be displayed in the cluster.
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided on the engine compartment fuse panel cover.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. Spare fuses are provided in the engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the power outlet fuse. If the head lamp, turn signal lamp, stop signal lamp, fog lamp, DRL, tail lamp, HMSL do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the engine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced.
NOTICE If the headlamp, fog lamp, turn signal lamp, or tail lamp malfunction even without any problem to the lamps, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer for assistance.
OYB076026
OYB076027
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 57
Maintenance
588
NOTICE Set all switches to ON before driv-
ing. If the vehicle is going to be unused
for over 1 month, set all switches to OFF to prevent the batteries from draining.
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with the memory fuse to prevent battery dis- charge if your vehicle is parked with- out being operated for prolonged periods. Use the following proce- dures before parking the vehicle for prolonged periods.
1. Turn off the engine. 2. Turn off the headlights and tail
lights. 3. Open the drivers side panel cover
and pull up the memory fuse.
If the memory fuse is pulled up from the fuse panel, the warning chime, audio, clock and interior lamps, etc., will not operate. Some items must be reset after replacement. Refer to Battery in this section. Even though the memory fuse is pulled up, the battery can still be dis- charged by operation of the head- lights or other electrical devices.
CAUTION — Fuse Panel Covers
The contact points of the switches may wear out with excessive use. Please refrain from excessive use of the switches (except for long-term parking for over 1 month).
OYB076037
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 58
8 59
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse replacement
1. Turn the ignition switch and all other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling the cover up. When the blade type fuse is disconnected, remove it by using the clip designed for chang- ing fuses located in the engine compartment fuse box. Upon removal, securely insert reserve fuse of the same rating.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized Kia dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable. 3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above. 4. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating. 5. Reverse these steps to reinstall
the multi fuse.
CAUTION After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel cover through the audible click- ing sound. If not, electrical failures may occur from water contact.
OYB076028
OYB076029
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 59
Maintenance
608
NOTICE — Window tinting pre- caution
Window tint(especially metallic film) might cause communication disorder or poor radio reception, and malfunction of the automatic lighting system due to excessive change of illumination inside the vehicle. The solution used might also flow into electric, electronic devices causing disorder and failure.
CAUTION Visually inspect the battery cap to ensure it is securely closed. If the battery cap is not securely closed, moisture may enter the system and damage the electri- cal components.
CAUTION — Remodeling Prohibited
Do not try remodeling the vehi- cle in any way. It is illegal, and may affect the vehicle’s perform- ance, durability, and safety. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover any problems caused by remodeling. Remodeling the vehicle can cause malfunction of the vehicle, wiring damage, bat- tery discharge, connector dam- age, or fire.
CAUTION Do not disassemble nor assem- ble the multi fuse when it is secured with nuts and bolts. Incorrect or partial assembly torque may cause a fire. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
CAUTION — Random wiring prohibited when retrofitting equipment
Use of random wiring in the vehicle might cause danger due to failure and damage of the vehicles performance. Using random wires especially when retrofitting AVN or theft alarm system, remote engine control, car phone or radio might damage the vehicle or cause fire.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 60
8 61
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description Drivers side fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
NOTICE Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
OSC076008
OYB076030
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 61
Maintenance
628
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
DOOR LOCK 20A Tail Gate Unlock Relay, Door Lock/Unlock Relay, Two Turn Unlock Relay
POWER OUTLET 20A Power Outlet
SAFETY P/WINDOW 25A Driver Safety Power Window Module
STOP LAMP 15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
T/SIGNAL LAMP 15A BCM (Body Control Module), SLM (Seat Belt & Lighting Module)
C/LIGHTER 20A Cigarette Lighter
HEATED MIRROR
10A Driver Power Outside Mirror, Passenger Power Outside Mirror, Air Conditioner Control Module, ECM (Engine Control Module)/PCM (Power train Control Module)
DRL2 10A BCM (Body Control Module)
P/WINDOW RH 25A Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch
S/HEATER 20A Front Seat Warmer Control Module
DRL1 10A —
START 7.5A With Immobilizer : ECM (Engine Control Module)/PCM (Power train Control Module), Engine Room Junction Block(Start Relay) Without Immobilizer : Burglar Alarm Relay
TAIL LAMP RH 7.5A Head Lamp Right Handle side, Rear Combination Lamp (OUT) Right Handle side, License Lamp Right Handle side, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) Right Handle side, Illumination (+)
MODULE2 10A Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) Unit, Crash Pad Switch
Instrument panel (Drivers side fuse panel)
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 62
8 63
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
TCU 15A Engine Room Junction Block(Back-Up Lamp Switch), Automatic Transmission Shift Lever, Transmission Range Switch, Stop Lamp Switch
P/WINDOW LH 25A Power Window Main Switch
SPARE1 25A Spare
FOG LAMP REAR 10A —
HEATED STEERING 15A Steering Wheel Heated
TAIL LAMP LH 7.5A Head Lamp Left Handle side, License Lamp Left Handle side, Rear Combination Lamp (OUT) Left Handle side, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) Left Handle side, Glove Box Lamp
MODULE3 7.5A Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Audio, Electro Chromic Mirror, Air Conditioner Control Module, Audio/Video & Navigation Head Unit, Clock Spring, Auto Transmission Shift Lever Indicator
ABS 7.5A Engine Room Junction Block(Multipurpose Check Connector), ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Module
BRAKE SWITCH 10A Stop Lamp Switch
SPARE4 15A Spare
FOG LAMP FRONT 15A Front Fog Lamp Relay
A/CON1 7.5A Engine Room Junction Block(Blower Relay), Air Conditioner Control Module
MODULE5 10A Engine Room Junction Block(Head Lamp Relay, Head Lamp Hi Relay), Rain Sensor, Sunroof Motor, Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Driver Safety Power Window Module
MODULE7 10A TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Unit
ECU 10A ECM (Engine Control Module)/PCM (Power train Control Module), Immobilizer Module
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 63
Maintenance
648
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
SUNROOF 15A Sunroof Motor
IMMO 10A Immobilizer Module
MODULE6 10A Key Solenoid, Center Facia Switch
SPARE2 10A Spare
MODULE4 7.5A SLM (Seat Belt & Lighting Module), BCM (Body Control Module)
SPARE5 10A Spare
AIR BAG 10A ACU (Airbag Control Unit), Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor
MODULE1 7.5A BCM (Body Control Module), SLM (Seat Belt & Lighting Module), Key Interlock
A/CON2 7.5A —
WIPER RR 15A Multifunction Switch, Rear Wiper Motor, Rear Wiper Relay
WIPER FRT 25A Multifunction Switch, Front Wiper Motor, Engine Room Junction Block(Wiper Low Relay)
ACC 10A Power Outlet Relay, BCM (Body Control Module), SLM (Seat Belt & Lighting Module), Audio, Key Interlock, Audio/Video & Navigation Head Unit, USB Charging Connector, Power Outside Mirror Switch
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 64
8 65
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
SPARE3 20A Spare
A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster
CLUSTER 7.5A Instrument Cluster
MDPS 7.5A MDPS (Motor Driven Power Steering) Unit
AUDIO 20A Audio, Audio/Video & Navigation Head Unit
ROOM LP 10A Room Lamp Relay, Glove Box Lamp, Air Conditioner Control Module, SLM (Seat Belt & Lighting Module), BCM (Body Control Module), Auto Light & Photo Sensor, TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Unit, Instrument Cluster, Data Link Connector, Room Lamp, Trunk Room Lamp
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:55 PM Page 65
Maintenance
668
Engine compartment fuse panel
OSC076012
OYB076031
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 66
8 67
Maintenance
Engine room compartment fuse panel
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
MDPS 80A MDPS (Motor Driven Power Steering) Unit
ALT 150A Fuse — ABS1, BAS2, BLOWER, REAR HEATED
REAR HEATED 40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Rear Defogger Relay)
ABS1 40A ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ABS2 40A ESC (Electronic Stability Control) Module
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
WIPER 10A Front Wiper Motor, Multifunction Switch, Wiper Low Relay
ECU4 15A ECM (Engine Control Module)/PCM (Power train Control Module)
SENSOR 10A Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Cooling Fan1/2 Relay, Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Air Conditioner Relay, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve
ECU2 15A ECM (Engine Control Module)/PCM (Power train Control Module)
ECU3 20A ECM (Engine Control Module)/PCM (Power train Control Module)
HEAD LAMP RH 10A Head Lamp Right Handle side
HEAD LAMP LH 10A Head Lamp Left Handle side
IGN COIL 20A Ignition Coil #1~#4, Condenser
ECU5 15A ECM (Engine Control Module)/PCM (Power train Control Module), Fuel Pump Relay
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 67
Maintenance
688
Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
B/UP LAMP 10A Back-Up Lamp Switch
B+1 40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Fuse — DRL2, FOGLAMP FRONT, STOP LAMP, MODULE6, Power Connector (AUDIO, ROOM LAMP))
B+2 50A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Fuse — IMMO, BRAKE SWITCH, SAFETY P/WINDOW, S/HEATER, SUNROOF, Power Window Relay)
IG2 40A Ignition Switch, IG2 Relay, Start Relay
COOLING FAN 40A Cooling Fan1/2 Relay
ECU1 30A Fuse — ECU3, ECU4, Main Relay
HEAD LAMP 20A Head Lamp Relay
H/LAMP HI 20A With CANADA DRL : SLM(Seat Belt & Lighting Module) or BCM(Body Control Module) Without CANADA DRL : Head Lamp HI Relay
FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay
HORN 15A Horn Relay/ Burglar Alarm Horn Relay
A/CON 10A Air Conditioner Relay
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
B+3 40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Fuse — T/SIGNAL LAMP, DOOR LOCK, Tail Lamp Relay)
IG1 40A Ignition Switch, IG1 Relay, ACC Relay
POWER OUTLET 40A Instrument Panel Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 68
8 69
Maintenance
Relay Name Type
Main Relay MINI
Start Relay MICRO
Fuel Pump Relay MICRO
Wiper HI Relay MICRO
H/Lamp HI Relay MICRO
Cooling Fan2 Relay MICRO
B/Alarm Horn Relay MICRO
Blower Relay MICRO
Cooling Fan1 Relay MICRO
Wiper LO Relay MICRO
Head Lamp Relay MICRO
Horn Relay MICRO
A/Con Relay MICRO
Relay
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 69
Maintenance
708
LIGHT BULBS Bulb replacement precaution Please keep extra bulbs on hand with appropriate wattage ratings in case of emergencies. Refer to Bulb Wattage in chapter 9. When changing lamps, first turn off the engine at a safe place, firmly apply the parking brake and detach the batterys negative (-) terminal.
Use only bulbs of the specified wattage.
Lamp part malfunction due to net-work failure
The headlamp, taillight, and fog light may light up when the head lamp switch is turned ON, and not light up when the taillight or for light switch is turned ON. This may be cause by network failure or vehicle electrical control system malfunction. If there is a problem, we recommend the sys- tem be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.
Lamp part malfunction due to elec- trical control system stabilization
A normally functioning lamp may flicker momentarily. This momentary occurrence is due to stabilization function of the vehicle’s electrical on control system. If the lamp soon returns to normal, the vehicle does not require service. However, if the lamp goes out after the momentary flickering, or the flick- ering continues, we recommend the system be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING — Working on the lights
Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and turn off the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehi- cle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.
CAUTION — Light replace- ment
Be sure to replace the burned- out bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the fuse or electric wiring system.
CAUTION — Headlamp Lens
To prevent damage, do not clean the headlamp lens with chemical solvents or strong detergents.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 70
8 71
Maintenance
NOTICE If the light bulb or lamp connector
is removed while the lamp is still on, the fuse box’s electronic sys- tem may log it as a malfunction. Therefore, a lamp malfunction incident may be recorded as a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in the fuse box.
It is normal for an operating lamp to flicker momentarily. This is due to a stabilization function of the vehicles electronic control device. If the lamp lights up normally after momentarily blinking, then it is functioning as normal. However, if the lamp continues to flicker several times or turns off completely, there may be an error in the vehicles electronic control device. Please have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer immediately.
NOTICE We recommend that the headlight aiming be adjusted after an accident or after the headlight assembly is rein- stalled at an authorized Kia dealer.
NOTICE After driving in heavy rain or wash- ing, headlamp and taillamp lenses could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature differ- ence between the lamp inside and outside. This is similar to the con- densation on your windows inside your vehicle during the rain and doesnt indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, we recommend that you have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
If you dont have the necessary tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise, consult an authorized Kia dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true if you have to remove the headlamp assembly to get to the bulb(s). Removing/installing the headlamp assembly can result in damage to the vehicle. If non-genuine parts or substandard bulbs are used, it may lead to blow- ing a fuse or other wiring damages. Do not install extra lamps or LEDs to the vehicle. If additional lights are installed, it may lead to lamp mal- functions and flickering. Additionally, the fuse box and other writing may be damaged.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 71
Maintenance
728
Light bulb position (Front) (1) Headlamp (Low/High) (Bulb type)
(2) Side marker (Bulb type) (3) Front turn signal lamp/
Position lamp (4) Front turn signal lamp
(Bulb type) (5) Headlamp (Low/High)
(Bulb/LED type) (6) Side marker (LED type) (7) Position lamp (LED type)
or Position lamp/Day time running lamp (LED type)
(8) Day time running lamp (Bulb type)
OSC077021N
OSC078022N
Head lamp — Type A
Head lamp — Type B OSC078045N
OSC078046N
D.R.L. Lamp — Type B
D.R.L. Lamp — Type A
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 72
8 73
Maintenance
(1) Rear turn signal lamp (Bulb type) (2) Back up lamp (Bulb type) (3) Stop and tail lamp (Bulb type) (4) Tail lamp (Bulb type) (5) Side marker (Bulb type) (6) Stop and tail lamp (LED type) (7) Side marker (LED type) (8) License plate lamp (9) High mounted stop lamp
Light bulb position (Rear) (5 Door)
OSC077023N
OSC077024N
Rear combination lamp (5 Door) — Type A
Rear combination lamp (5 Door) — Type B OSC077025N
OSC077026N
License plate lamp (5 Door)
High mounted stop lamp (5 Door)
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 73
Maintenance
748
(1) Rear turn signal lamp (Bulb type) (2) Back up lamp (Bulb type) (3) Stop and tail lamp/Side marker
(Bulb type) (4) Tail lamp (Bulb type) (5) Stop lamp (LED type) (6) Tail lamp (LED type) (7) Side marker (LED type) (8) License plate lamp (9) High mounted stop lamp
Light bulb position (Rear) (4 Door)
OSC077027N
OSC077028N
Rear combination lamp (4 Door) — Type A
Rear combination lamp (4 Door) — Type B OSC077025N
OSC077029N
License plate lamp (4 Door)
High mounted stop lamp (4 Door)
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 74
8 75
Maintenance
Light bulb position (Side)
(1) Side repeater lamp (LED type) (2) Side repeater lamp (bulb type)
Headlamp (Low/High beam) (Bulb type) bulb replacement (Headlamp Type A)
1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector. 4. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retain-
ing wire by pressing the end and pushing it upward.
5. Remove the bulb from the head lamp assembly.
6. Install a new headlamp bulb and snap the headlamp bulb retaining wire into position by aligning the wire with the groove on the bulb.
7. Connect the headlamp bulb sock- et-connector.
8. Install the headlamp bulb cover by turning it clockwise.
OYB076047
OYB076048
Type A
Type B
OYB076049
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 75
Maintenance
768
Headlamp bulb Side marker (front) (Bulb type) bulb replacement (Headlamp Type A)
1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the bulb-socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb-socket align with the slots on the headlamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb- socket by pulling it out.
WARNING — Halogen bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if bro- ken.
(Continued)
OHD076046
(Continued) Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra- sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit. A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.
If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediate- ly and carefully dispose of it.
Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before han- dling it.
OSC078051N
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:56 PM Page 76
8 77
Maintenance
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the bulb-socket.
5. Install the socket in the headlamp assembly by aligning the tabs on the bulb-socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the bulb-sock- et into the headlamp assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement (Headlamp Type A)
1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the bulb-socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb-socket align with the slots on the headlamp assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb- socket by pressing it in and rotat- ing it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the bulb-socket. Pull the bulb out of the bulb-socket
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the bulb-socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
5. Install the socket in the headlamp assembly by aligning the tabs on the bulb-socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the bulb-sock- et into the headlamp assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
OYB076051
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:57 PM Page 77
Maintenance
788
Headlamp (Low/High beam) (Bulb type) bulb replacement (Headlamp Type B)
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the headlamp assembly by turning the bulb-socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb-socket align with the slots on the headlamp assembly.
5. Install a new bulb-socket assem- bly in the headlamp assembly by aligning the tabs on the bulb-sock- et with the slots in the headlamp assembly. Push the bulb-socket into the headlamp assembly and turn the bulb-socket clockwise.
6. Install the headlamp bulb cover by turning it clockwise.
Headlamp bulb
OYB076052
OQL075058
WARNING — Halogen bulbs
Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if bro- ken.
(Continued)
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:57 PM Page 78
8 79
Maintenance
Headlamp (Low/High beam) (LED type) bulb replacement (Headlamp Type B)
If the headlamp (Low/High beam) (1) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement (Headlamp Type B)
1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Remove the bulb-socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning the bulb-socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb-socket align with the slots on the headlamp assembly.
(Continued) Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra- sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit. A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.
If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediate- ly and carefully dispose of it.
Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before han- dling it.
OSC078038
OYB076054
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:57 PM Page 79
Maintenance
808
4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pressing it in and rotat- ing it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the bulb-socket. Pull the bulb out of the bulb-socket
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the bulb-socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the headlamp assembly by aligning the tabs on the bulb-socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the bulb-sock et into the headlamp assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the headlamp bulb cover by turning it clockwise.
Side marker (front) (LED type) bulb replacement (Headlamp Type B)
If the Side marker (LED) (1) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. The LED lamps cannot be replaced as a single component because it is part of an integrated unit. The LED lamps have to be replaced with the unit. A skilled technician should check or repair the Side marker (LED), for it may damage related parts of the vehicle.
Position lamp + DRL (LED type) bulb replacement
If the position lamp + DRL (LED) (1) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. The LED lamps cannot be replaced as a single component because it is part of an integrated unit. The LED lamps have to be replaced with the unit. A skilled technician should check or repair the position lamp + DRL (LED), for it may damage related parts of the vehicle.
OSC078053N
OSC077037N
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:57 PM Page 80
8 81
Maintenance
Daytime running lamp (Bulb type) bulb replacement
If the DRL (1) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer.
A skilled technician should check or repair the DRL bulb, for it may dam- age related parts of the vehicle.
Side repeater lamp (LED type) bulb Replacement
If the side repeater lamp (LED) (1) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. The LED lamps cannot be replaced as a single component because it is part of an integrated unit. The LED lamps have to be replaced with the unit. A skilled technician should check or repair the side repeater lamp (LED), for it may damage related parts of the vehicle.
OYB076057
OYB076058
Type A
Type B OYB076047
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:57 PM Page 81
Maintenance
828
Side repeater lamp (bulb type) bulb Replacement
1. Remove the lamp assembly from the vehicle by prying the lens and pulling the assembly out.
2. Disconnect the bulb electrical con- nector.
3. Separate the socket and the lens parts by turning the socket coun- terclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the lens part.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
5. Insert a new bulb in the socket. 6. Reassemble the socket and the
lens part. 7. Connect the bulb electrical con-
nector. 8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.
Stop and tail lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door)
1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Loosen the light assembly retain-
ing screws with a cross-tip screw- driver.
OYB076059 OYB076060
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:57 PM Page 82
8 83
Maintenance
3. Remove the rear combination lamp assembly from the body of the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the rear combination lamp connector.
5. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counter- clockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Install the rear combination lamp assembly to the body of the vehi- cle.
OYB076061 OYB076062
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:57 PM Page 83
Maintenance
848
Rear turn signal lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door)
1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Loosen the light assembly retain-
ing screws with a cross-tip screw- driver.
3. Remove the rear combination lamp assembly from the body of the vehicle.
4. Disconnect the rear combination lamp connector.
5. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
6. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counter- clockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
OYB076060
OYB076061 OYB076063
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:57 PM Page 84
8 85
Maintenance
8. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Install the rear combination lamp assembly to the body of the vehi- cle.
Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement (for 5 door)
If the stop and tail lamp (LED) (1) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. The LED lamps cannot be replaced as a single component because it is part of an integrated unit. The LED lamps have to be replaced with the unit. A skilled technician should check or repair the stop and tail lamp (LED), for it may damage related parts of the vehicle.
Back-up lamp bulb replace- ment (for 5 door)
1. Open the tailgate. 2. Remove the service cover.
OYB076064 OYB076065
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:57 PM Page 85
Maintenance
868
3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket by pulling it out.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the bulb-socket.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting it into the service hole.
Tail lamp (inside) bulb replace- ment (for 5 door)
1. Open the tailgate. 2. Remove the service cover.
3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket by pulling it out.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the bulb-socket.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the service cover by putting it into the service hole.
OYB076066
OYB076065
OYB076067
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 86
8 87
Maintenance
Side marker (rear) (Bulb type) bulb replacement (Rear combi- nation lamp Type A) (for 5 door)
1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the service cover. 3. Loosen the light assembly retain-
ing screws with a cross-tip screw- driver.
4. Remove the rear combination lamp assembly from the body of the vehicle.
5. Disconnect the rear combination lamp connector.
6. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
7. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket by pulling it out.
8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the bulb-socket.
9. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
OYB076060
OYB076061 OSC078052N
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 87
Maintenance
888
10. Connect the rear combination lamp connector.
11. Install the rear combination lamp assembly to the body of the vehi- cle.
12. Install the service cover.
Side marker (rear) (LED type) bulb replacement (Rear combi- nation lamp Type B) (for 5 door)
If the Side marker (LED) (1) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. The LED lamps cannot be replaced as a single component because it is part of an integrated unit. The LED lamps have to be replaced with the unit. A skilled technician should check or repair the Side marker (LED), for it may damage related parts of the vehicle.
High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door)
If the high mounted stop lamp (1) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. A skilled technician should check or repair the high mounted stop lamp, for it may damage related parts of the vehicle.
OSC078024N
OYB076089
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 88
8 89
Maintenance
License plate lamp bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens cover from lamp housing.
2. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
3. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket by pulling it out.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the bulb-socket.
5. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
6. Align the lens cover tabs with the lamp housing notches and snap the lens into place.
Rear turn signal lamp bulb replacement (for 4 door)
1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the service cover by
pulling out the service cover.
OYB076069 OSC077030N
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 89
Maintenance
908
3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the service cover.
Stop and tail lamp / Side mark- er (Bulb type) replacement (for 4 door)
1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the service cover by
pulling out the service cover.
OSC077031N
OSC077030N
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 90
8 91
Maintenance
3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the service cover.
Side marker (rear) (LED type) bulb replacement (Rear combi- nation lamp Type B) (for 4 door)
If the Side marker (LED) (1) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. The LED lamps cannot be replaced as a single component because it is part of an integrated unit. The LED lamps have to be replaced with the unit. A skilled technician should check or repair the Side marker (LED), for it may damage related parts of the vehicle.
OSC077032N
OSC078028N
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 91
Maintenance
928
Back-up lamp bulb replace- ment (for 4 door)
1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Loosen the retaining screw of the
trunk lid cover and then remove the cover.
3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket by pulling it out.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the bulb-socket.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the trunk lid cover.
Tail lamp (Bulb type) bulb replacement (for 4 door)
1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Loosen the retaining screw of the
trunk lid cover and then remove the cover.
OSC077034N
OSC077035N
OSC077034N
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 92
8 93
Maintenance
3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.
7. Install the trunk lid cover.
Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement (for 4 door)
If the stop and tail lamp (LED) (1,2) does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. The LED lamps cannot be replaced as a single component because it is part of an integrated unit. The LED lamps have to be replaced with the unit. A skilled technician should check or repair the stop and tail lamp (LED), for it may damage related parts of the vehicle.
OSC077036N
OSC077033N
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 93
Maintenance
948
High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement (for 4 door)
1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Remove the socket from the hous-
ing by turning the socket counter- clockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the housing.
3. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket by pulling it out.
4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the bulb-socket.
5. Install the socket in the housing by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the housing. Push the socket into the housing and turn the socket clockwise.
Trunk lamp bulb replacement (for 4 door)
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens cover from lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap the lens into place.
OUC076063 OUC076061
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 94
8 95
Maintenance
Map lamp bulb replacement 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lamp assembly from interior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Install the lamp assembly to interior.
OYB076070
WARNING — Interior lamps Prior to working on the Interior lamps, ensure that the OFF button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiv- ing an electric shock.
CAUTION Be careful not to dirty or dam- age the lens, lens tab, and plas- tic housings.
CAUTION Be careful not to dirty or dam- age the lens, lens tab, and plas- tic housings.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 95
Maintenance
968
Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lamp assembly from interior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Install the lamp assembly to interior.
Room lamp bulb replacement
CAUTION Be careful not to dirty or dam- age the lens, lens tab, and plas- tic housings.
OQL075067
WARNING — Interior lamps Prior to working on the Interior lamps, ensure that the OFF button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiv- ing an electric shock.
WARNING — Interior lamps Prior to working on the Interior lamps, ensure that the OFF button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiv- ing an electric shock.
OYB076071
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:58 PM Page 96
8 97
Maintenance
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens cover from lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap the lens into place.
Glove box lamp bulb replacement
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lamp assembly from interior.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Install the lamp assembly to interior.
OYB076072
CAUTION Be careful not to dirty or dam- age the lens, lens tab, and plas- tic housings.
CAUTION Be careful not to dirty or dam- age the lens, lens tab, and plas- tic housings.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 97
Maintenance
988
Tailgate room lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door)
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens cover from lamp housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Align the lens cover tabs with the
lamp housing notches and snap the lens into place.
CAUTION Be careful not to dirty or dam- age the lens, lens tab, and plas- tic housings.
OYB076073
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 98
8 99
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE Exterior care Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.
Finish maintenance Washing
To help protect your vehicles finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water. If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate- rials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean. Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicles finish if not removed immediately. Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used. After washing, rinse the vehicle thor- oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.
WARNING After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 99
Maintenance
1008
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure wash- ers, make sure to maintain suffi- cient distance from the vehicle. Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.
Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not oper- ate normally.
Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers) or connectors as they may be dam- aged if they come into contact with high pressure water.
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint. Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturers instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to main- tain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and similar materi- als with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need wax- ing. Do not apply wax on embossed unpainted unit, as it may tarnish the unit.
OJB037800
CAUTION — Wet engine Water washing in the engine
compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment.
Never allow water or other liq- uids to come in contact with electrical/electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 100
8 101
Maintenance
Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense. If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replace- ment, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.
To protect the surfaces of bright- metal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preser- vative and rub to a high luster.
During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance Road salt and other corrosive chemi- cals are used in cold weather states to melt snow and prevent ice accumula- tion. If these chemicals are not regu- larly removed, they will corrode the vehicle underbody and over time dam- age fuel lines, the fuel tank retention system, the vehicle suspension, the exhaust system, and even the body frame. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration has warned all vehicle owners of all brands of the need to take the following steps: Wash the undercarriage of your
vehicle regularly during the winter and whenever your vehicle has been exposed to such salts or chemicals.
CAUTION — Drying vehicle Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.
Do not use steel wool, abra- sive cleaners, acid detergents or strong detergents contain- ing high alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 101
Maintenance
1028
Do a thorough washing of the undercarriage at the end of the winter.
Use professional service techni- cians or governmental inspection stations to annually inspect for cor- rosion.
Immediately seek an inspection of your vehicle if you become visually aware of corrosion flaking or scal- ing or if you become aware of a change in vehicle performance, such as soft or spongey brakes, fluids leaking, impairment of direc- tional control, suspension noises or rattling metal straps.
Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish. Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels. They may scratch the finish.
Clean the wheel when it has cooled.
Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, be sure to clean the wheels after driving on salted roads. This helps prevent corro- sion.
Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed vehicle wash brushes.
Do not use any alkaline or acid detergents It may damage and cor- rode the aluminum wheels coated with a clear protective finish.
Corrosion protection Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, we produce vehicles of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner’s cooperation and assistance is also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro- sion on your vehicle are: Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.
Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abra- sion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 102
8 103
Maintenance
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehi- cle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated cor- rosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, partic- ularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in con- tact with the vehicles surface by moisture that evaporates slowly. Mud is particularly corrosive because it dries slowly and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler- ate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these rea- sons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other mate- rials. This applies not only to the vis- ible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from beginning by observing the following:
Keep your vehicle clean The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is partic- ularly important.
If you live in a high-corrosion area where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc., you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.
When cleaning underneath the vehicle, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pres- sure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 103
Maintenance
1048
When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accel- erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry Don’t park your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This cre- ates a favorable environment for cor- rosion. This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can con- tribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good con- dition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with «touch-up» paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the atten- tion of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.
Bird droppings: Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.
Don’t neglect the interior Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting and cause corro- sion. Check under the mats periodi- cally to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertil- izers, cleaning materials or chemi- cals in the vehicle. These should be carried only in prop- er containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.
Interior care Interior general precautions Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean- er, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately. If neces- sary, use a vinyl cleaner, see product instructions for correct usage.
CAUTION — Electrical components
Never allow water or other liq- uids to come in contact with electrical/electronic compo- nents inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 104
8 105
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and inte- rior trim Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recom- mended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant prop- erties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained. Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabrics appearance and fire- resistant properties.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt webbing Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, cov- ered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with a glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.
Taking care of leather seats Vacuum the seat periodically to
remove dust and sand on the seat. It will prevent abrasion or damage of the leather and maintain its quality.
Wipe the natural leather seat cover often with dry or soft cloth.
Sufficient use of a leather protec- tive may prevent abrasion of the cover and helps maintain the color. Be sure to read the instructions and consult a specialist when using leather coating or protective agents.
Leather with bright colors(beige, cream beige) is easily contaminat- ed and clear in appearance. Clean the seats frequently.
Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may cause the surface to crack.
CAUTION — Rear window Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage of the rear window defroster grid.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 105
Maintenance
1068
Cleaning the leather seats Remove all contaminations instant-
ly. Refer to instructions below for removal of each contaminant.
Cosmetic products(sunscreen, foundation, etc.) — Apply cleansing cream on a cloth
and wipe the contaminated point. Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth and remove water with a dry cloth.
Beverages(coffee, soft drink, etc.) — Apply a small amount of neutral
detergent and wipe until contami- nations do not smear.
Oil — Remove oil instantly with
absorbable cloth and wipe with stain remover for natural leather only.
Chewing gum — Harden the gum with ice and
remove gradually.
Fabric seat cover using precau- tions (If equipped) Please clean the fabric seats regu- larly with a vacuum cleaner in con- sideration of fabric material charac- teristics. If they are heavily soiled with beverage stains, etc., use a suit- able interior cleaner. To prevent dam- age to seat covers, wipe off the seat covers down to the seams with a large wiping motion and moderate pressure using a soft sponge or microfiber cloth. Velcro closures on clothing or sharp objects may cause snagging or scratches on the surface of the seats. Make sure not to rub such objects against the surface.
CAUTION — Leather When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alco- hol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 106
8 107
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM The emission control system of your vehicle is covered by a written limited warranty. Please see the warranty information contained in the Warranty & Consumer Information manual in your vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system to meet all applicable emission regulations. There are three emission control systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys- tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys- tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehicle inspected and maintained by an authorized Kia dealer in accor- dance with the maintenance sched- ule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and Maintenance Test (With Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system) To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test- ing, turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch.
After dynamometer testing is completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the ESC switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control system
The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con- trol (including ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery) system
The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmos- phere. (The ORVR system is designed to allow the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refu- eling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel vapors into the atmosphere.)
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 107
Maintenance
1088
Canister Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the onboard canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control sole- noid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV) The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant temperature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evap- orated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control system
The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle per- formance.
Vehicle modifications This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate gov- ernmental safety and emissions reg- ulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modifi- cation may not be covered under warranty. If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions (carbon monoxide) Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehi- cle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immediately.
WARNING — Exhaust Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions on this page to avoid CO poi- soning.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 108
8 109
Maintenance
Do not operate the engine in con- fined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area.
When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle.
Never sit in a parked or stopped vehicle for any extended time with the engine running.
When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system.
Operating precautions for catalyt- ic converters (if equipped)
WARNING — Catalytic converter
Keep away from the catalytic converter and exhaust system while the vehicle is running or immediately thereafter. The exhaust and catalytic systems are very hot and may burn you.
WARNING — Fire Do not park, idle or drive the
vehicle over or near flamma- ble objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc. A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehicle.
Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust sys- tem, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a fire risk under certain conditions.
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 109
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat- alytic converter emission control device. Therefore, the following precautions must be observed: Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines. Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc- tion, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance.
Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off.
Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 minutes or more).
Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission con- trol system. All inspections and adjustments must be made by an authorized Kia dealer.
Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, dam- aging the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalyt- ic converter and to your vehicle. Additionally, such actions could void your warranties.
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/haz- ardouswaste/ perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers: Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Chapter 67384.10 (a).
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
8 110
Maintenance
SC USA 8.qxp 7/18/2018 5:59 PM Page 110
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Weight/volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 9-7 Recommended SAE viscosity number. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Refrigerant label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Consumer assistance (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Electrical Equipment (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Online factory authorized manuals (U.S. only) . . 9-15
9
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:52 PM Page 1
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
29
ENGINE Item Gamma 1.6L GDI
Displacement [cu.in(cc)] 97.09 (1,591)
Bore x Stroke [in(mm)] 3.03 x 3.36 (77 x 85.4)
Firing order 1 3 4 2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line
DIMENSIONS Item in (mm)
Overall length 4 Door 172.6 (4,385) 5 Door 160 (4,065)
Overall width 67.9 (1,725)
Overall height 4 Door 57.1 (1,450) 5 Door 57.1 (1,450)
Front tread 185/65R15 60.0 (1,524) 205/45R17 59.5 (1,512)
Rear tread 185/65R15 60.2 (1,529) 205/45R17 59.7 (1,517)
Wheelbase 101.6 (2,580)
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:52 PM Page 2
9 3
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
BULB WATTAGE Light Bulb Wattage(W) Bulb type
Front
Head lamp (Low/High) Bulb type 55/60W HB2
LED type LED LED
Front turn signal lamps 21W PY21W
Front position lamps Bulb type 8W PY28/8W
LED type 0.5W x 12 LED
Daytime running lamp (DRL)* Bulb type 21W P21W
LED type 1W x 12 LED
Side Marker Lamp Bulb type 5W W5W
LED type 0.5W x 2 LED
Rear
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) Bulb type
21W/5W P21/5W
Rear tail lamps (Inside) 5W W5W
Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) LED type
1W LED
Rear tail lamps (Inside) 0.2W LED
Side Marker Lamp Bulb type 5W W5W
LED type 0.2W x 3 LED
Rear turn signal lamps 21W PY21W
Back-up lamps 16W W16W
High mounted stop lamp* 5W x 4 W5W
License plate lamps 5W x 2 W5W
* If equipped (Continued)
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:52 PM Page 3
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
49
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Interior
Map lamps* 10W x 2 W10W
Room lamps 8W FESTOON
Vanity mirror lamps* 8W FESTOON
Glove box lamp* 8W FESTOON
Luggage room lamp 8W FESTOON
(Continued)
* If equipped
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:52 PM Page 4
9 5
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
TIRES AND WHEELS
CAUTION When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size may damage the related parts or cause them to operate improperly.
*1 : Normal load : Up to 3 persons
*2 : If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, it will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit
Item Tire size Wheel size
Inflation pressure kPa (psi) Wheel lug nut torque
kgfm (lbfft, Nm) Normal load *1 Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire 185/65R15 5.5J X 15
230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33) 11~13
(79~94, 107~127) 205/45R17 6.5J X 17
Compact spare tire *2 T125/80D15 3.5J x 15 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
NOTICE We recommend replacing tires with the same make and model originally supplied with the vehicle; not doing so
may affect driving performance. When driving in high altitude grades such as mountainous areas, injection of additional air into tires may be
required due to lower atmospheric pressure. Therefore, add 1.5 psi for every 1,000m above sea level at the recom- mended tire pressure when frequently driving in high mountainous areas.
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:52 PM Page 5
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
69
WEIGHT/VOLUME
Item Gamma 1.6L GDI
4 Door 5 Door
Gross vehicle weight
lbs. (kg) A/T 3,616 (1,640) 3,616 (1,640)
Luggage volume cu ft (l)
13.7 (387) 17.4 *1 / 32.8 *2
(493 *1 / 928 *2)
Item Weight of volume Classification
Refrigerant 480 25g
16.9 0.88 oz R-1234yf
Compressor lubricant 110 10g
3.9 0.35 oz FD46XG (IDEMITSU)
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.
*1 : Behind rear seat to upper edge of the seat back.
*2 : Behind front seat to roof.
A/T : Automatic transmission
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:52 PM Page 6
9 7
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality. The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy. These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill) Recommends
Gamma 1.6L GDI 3.7 US qt. (3.5 l) API Latest (ILSAC Latest)
Automatic transmission fluid Gamma 1.6L GDI 7.1 US qt. (6.7 l) ATF SP-IV (Recommended MICHANG, SK, NOCA, Kia genuine)
Coolant Gamma 1.6L GDI A/T 5.81 US qt.(5.5 l) Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene-glycol with phosphate based coolant for cooling device)
Brake/clutch fluid 0.7~0.8 US qt.
(0.7~0.8 l) FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Fuel 11.9 US gal (45 l) Unleaded gasoline
A/T : Automatic transmission
*1 : Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page. *2 : Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-
omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a years time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
SC USA 9.qxp 8/3/2018 5:52 PM Page 7
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
89
Recommended SAE viscosity number Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operation (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi- ty engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather perform- ance, however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfac- tory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage. When choosing an oil, con- sider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.
*1 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API Latest (ILSAC Latest)). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature C
(F) -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Gamma 1.6L GDI *1
10W-30
5W-20*1, 5W-30 Engine
Oil
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:52 PM Page 8
9 9
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in register- ing your vehicle and in all legal mat- ters pertaining to its ownership, etc. The number is punched under driver or front passenger seat.
VIN label The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.
The vehicle certification label attatched on the drivers side center pillar gives the vehicle identification number (VIN).
OBH088005N
VIN Label
OUB081001
OUB081003
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION- LABELFrame Number
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 9
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
109
The tires supplied on your new vehi- cle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving. The tire label located on the driver’s side center pillar gives the tire pres- sures recommended for your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.
The refrigerant label is located on the underside of the hood. The label contains the following infor- mation : Type of refrigerant Amount of refrigerant
REFRIGERANT LABELTIRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL
OYB086002
OUB071018
ENGINE NUMBER
OSC087004N
Gamma 1.6L GDI Engine (Gasoline)
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 10
9 11
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current model year Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is deliv- ered to the first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in- service date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60 months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject to the terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the Kia Warranty and Consumer Information Manual applicable to your model year vehicle. KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other benefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA’s judgment, the claims and/or service requests are excessive in fre- quency or type of occurrence.
Toll free consumer assistance Kia’s toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed from 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542). For more information regarding assistance available, please refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer Information Manual.
Emergency roadside assistance Kia’s toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24 hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing 1-800-333-4Kia (4542). Please note that you must provide your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time of your call. The VIN can be found on the dash of your vehicle on the drivers side, on the door jamb of the dri- vers door, your vehicles registration or proof of insur- ance card.
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 11
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
129
Kia utilizes a network of over 30,000 roadside assistance providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require a battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia Roadside Assistance Representative will dispatch some- one to deliver a small quantity of gas, change a flat tire with your inflated spare, or arrange a battery jump to allow you to proceed to your destination. We have access to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths to help you should you become locked out of your Kia. In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehi- cle undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kias Roadside Assistance Representative will arrange to transport your vehicle to the nearest Kia dealer or to an alternative service location. Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this service.
NOTICE Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any Kia vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a sal- vage title or similar branded title under any states law or has been declared a total loss or equivalent by a financial institution or insurance company.
Trip interruption Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the event that a warranty-related disablement occurs more than 150 miles from your home, and the repairs require more than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimburse- ment is included for meals, lodging, or rental car expens- es. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100 per day subject to a three day maximum limit per incident. You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center to obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia Roadside Assistance Center gives authorization for trip interruption benefits, they will assist you in making the necessary arrangements. Insurance deductibles, expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company or other providers are not eligible for reimbursement. Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under Kias Trip Interruption Policy.
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 12
9 13
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country, you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in that country. Even if you successfully register the vehicle in a foreign country, you may experience the following problems and should therefore consider the possibility of having to deal with them:
1. The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable. If other than the specified fuel is used, it could cause damage to the engine, the fuel injection system, and other fuel-related parts which may not be covered under your New Vehicle Emissions Limited Warranty.
2. We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave the country in which you purchased your Kia new and register it in another country, problems arising from the use of fuel other than the specified fuel are not subject to manufacturers warranty. Because vehicles like yours may not be marketed in the new country of reg- istration, parts, servicing techniques and tools neces- sary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be unavailable. Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical specifications required by the government may vary enough from the country of purchase to cause addi- tional problems.
3. There may not be an Authorized Kia Dealer in the area in which you plan to register your vehicle. You may additionally experience difficulty in obtaining services in a foreign country for any number of reasons.
Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for prob- lems that result from unsatisfactory service or lack of service outside of the United States.
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 13
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
149
The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to per- form under all reasonably expected operating conditions. However,before any additional electrical equipment is installed in your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your war- ranty. Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is installed, may adversely affect the operation of your vehi- cle, includingsuch systems as the engine control system, the audio system and the electrical charging system and thus potentially void all or part of your warranty. We assume no responsibility for any expense you may incur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its components or systems that may result from the installa- tion of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied, or recommended for installation by, Kia.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly, or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, other electronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoid damage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized Kia Dealer concerning the proper equipment and installation. Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner’s Manual, particu- larly the information under the headings «NOTICE», «CAUTION» and «WARNING».
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and defects please contact your Kia’s toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line as below:
National Consumer Affairs Manager Kia Motors America, Inc. P.O. Box 52410 Irvine, CA 92619-2410 1-800-333-4Kia (4542)
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 14
9 15
Specifications, Consumer information, Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia Motors America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam- paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi- vidual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; download the SaferCar mobile application; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave. SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
The following publications are available on www.KiaTechinfo.com
Service manual: This manual covers maintenance and recommended pro- cedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to under- stand.
Electrical troubleshooting manual: This manual complements the Service Manual by provid- ing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Owner’s manual: This manual describes the overall features and operating procedures for the vehicle.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS (U.S. ONLY)
SC USA 9.qxp 7/18/2018 5:53 PM Page 15
Index
I
SC USA Index.qxp 7/18/2018 6:05 PM Page 1
Index
2I
Air bag — advanced supplemental restraint system……..3-32
Adding equipment to or modifying your
air bag-equipped vehicle ……………………………………3-60
Air bag warning label …………………………………………3-60
Air bag warning light…………………………………………..3-36
Curtain air bag ……………………………………………………3-52
Driver’s and passenger’s front air bag ……………………3-47
How does the air bag system operate ……………………3-33
Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag..3-54
Occupant detection system ………………………………….3-39
Side air bag ……………………………………………………….3-50
SRS Care …………………………………………………………..3-59
SRS components and functions …………………………….3-36
Air cleaner …………………………………………………………..8-29
Filter replacement ………………………………………………8-29
Air conditioning system …………………………………………..9-6
Appearance care ……………………………………………………8-99
Exterior care……………………………………………………….8-99
Interior care ……………………………………………………..8-104
Audio (with touch screen) ……………………………………….5-8
Feature of your audio…………………………………………….5-9
Media ………………………………………………………………..5-19
Phone ………………………………………………………………..5-29
Radio ………………………………………………………………..5-15
Setup ………………………………………………………………..5-37
SiriusXM …………………………………………………………..5-17
Audio system …………………………………………………………5-2
Antenna ………………………………………………………………5-2
AUX, USB port ……………………………………………………5-3
How vehicle audio works ……………………………………..5-3
Automatic climate control system …………………………4-105
Automatic heating and air conditioning ………………4-106
Manual heating and air conditioning ……………………4-107
System operation ………………………………………………4-112
Automatic transmission …………………………………………..6-9
Automatic transmission operation …………………………..6-9
Good driving practices…………………………………………6-14
Battery………………………………………………………………….8-37
For best battery service ……………………………………….8-37
Recharging the battery …………………………………………8-38
Reset items…………………………………………………………8-39
Before driving…………………………………………………………6-4
Before entering vehicle …………………………………………6-4
Before starting ……………………………………………………..6-4
Necessary inspections …………………………………………..6-4
Brake system…………………………………………………………6-15
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) …………………………….6-20
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ……………………….6-21
Good braking practices ……………………………………….6-28
Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) …………………………….6-25
Parking brake ……………………………………………………..6-17
A
B
SC USA Index.qxp 7/18/2018 6:05 PM Page 2
I 3
Index
Power brakes ……………………………………………………..6-15
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)……………………6-26
Brake/clutch fluid ………………………………………………….8-26
Checking the brake/clutch fluid level ……………………8-26
Bulb wattage …………………………………………………………..9-3
California perchlorate notice ………………………………..8-110
Checking fluid levels …………………………………………….8-20
Child Restraint System (CRS) ………………………………..3-25
Using a child restraint system ………………………………3-26
Climate control air filter …………………………………………8-31
Filter inspection ………………………………………………….8-31
Consumer assistance (U.S. only) …………………………….9-11
Cruise control system …………………………………………….6-41
Cruise control switch …………………………………………..6-41
To cancel cruise control ……………………………………….6-43
To decrease the cruising speed …………………………….6-43
To increase cruise control set speed ……………………..6-42
To resume cruising speed at more than approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) …………………………………………….6-44
To set cruise control speed……………………………………6-42
To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on ..6-43
To turn cruise control off ……………………………………..6-45
Declaration of conformity ……………………………………..5-40
FCC ………………………………………………………………….5-40
Defroster ………………………………………………………………4-93
Rear window defroster…………………………………………4-93
Dimensions …………………………………………………………….9-2
Door locks…………………………………………………………….4-12
Auto door lock/unlock feature ………………………………4-15
Child-protector rear door lock ………………………………4-15
Impact sensing door unlock system……………………….4-15
Operating door locks from inside the vehicle …………4-13
Operating door locks from outside the vehicle ……….4-12
Speed sensing door lock system …………………………..4-15
Economical operation …………………………………………….6-47
Electrical Equipment (U.S. only) …………………………….9-14
Emergency starting ………………………………………………….7-5
Jump starting ……………………………………………………….7-5
Emission control system……………………………………….8-107
Crankcase emission control system……………………..8-107
Evaporative emission control (including ORVR:Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery) system ……………………8-107
Exhaust emission control system…………………………8-108
Engine ……………………………………………………………………9-2
Engine compartment …………………………………………2-7, 8-4
C
D
E
SC USA Index.qxp 7/18/2018 6:05 PM Page 3
Index
4I
Engine coolant ……………………………………………………..8-23
Changing the coolant …………………………………………..8-25
Checking the coolant level……………………………………8-23
Engine number ……………………………………………………..9-10
Engine oil …………………………………………………………….8-21
Changing the engine oil and filter …………………………8-22
Checking the engine oil level ………………………………8-21
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items …………..8-15
Exterior overview ……………………………………………………2-2
Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system
(Radar type) ……………………………………………………….6-30
Brake operation ………………………………………………….6-33
FCA warning message and system control …………….6-32
Limitation of the system ……………………………………..6-36
Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in front
(front radar) ……………………………………………………..6-34
System malfunction …………………………………………….6-35
System setting and activation ………………………………6-30
Fuel filler lid …………………………………………………………4-31
Closing the fuel filler lid ……………………………………..4-31
Opening the fuel filler lid ……………………………………4-31
Fuel requirements ……………………………………………………1-3
Do not use methanol …………………………………………….1-4
Fuel Additives ……………………………………………………..1-5
Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol ………………1-3
Fuses ……………………………………………………………………8-55
Engine compartment fuse replacement ………………….8-59
Fuse/relay panel description ………………………………..8-61
Inner panel fuse replacement ………………………………..8-57
Memory fuse ……………………………………………………..8-58
Hood ……………………………………………………………………4-28
Closing the hood ………………………………………………..4-29
Hood open warning …………………………………………….4-29
Opening the hood………………………………………………..4-28
How to use this manual …………………………………………..1-2
If the engine overheats …………………………………………….7-6
If the engine will not start ……………………………………….7-4
If engine turns over normally but does not start ……….7-4
If the engine doesn’t turn over or turns over slowly ….7-4
If you have a flat tire (with spare tire) ……………………..7-18
Changing tires ……………………………………………………7-20
Jack and tools……………………………………………………..7-18
Jack label …………………………………………………………..7-27
Removing and storing the spare tire ……………………..7-19
In case of an emergency while driving……………………….7-3
If engine stalls while driving ………………………………….7-3
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing …………..7-3
F
H
I
SC USA Index.qxp 7/18/2018 6:05 PM Page 4
I 5
Index
If you have a flat tire while driving…………………………7-3
Instrument cluster ………………………………………………….4-46
Gauges ………………………………………………………………4-48
Instrument cluster control ……………………………………4-47
LCD window control …………………………………………..4-47
Transmission shift indicator………………………………….4-51
Instrument panel overview ……………………………………….2-6
Interior features……………………………………………………4-122
Clothes hanger ………………………………………………….4-126
Covering shelf (for 5 door) ………………………………..4-128
Cup holder ……………………………………………………….4-122
Floor mat anchor(s) …………………………………………..4-127
Power outlet ……………………………………………………..4-124
Seat warmer ……………………………………………………..4-123
Shopping bag holder …………………………………………4-127
Sunvisor …………………………………………………………..4-122
USB charger……………………………………………………..4-125
Interior light …………………………………………………………4-88
Automatic turn off function ………………………………….4-88
Glove box lamp ………………………………………………….4-91
Luggage room lamp…………………………………………….4-91
Map lamp …………………………………………………………..4-88
Room lamp…………………………………………………………4-89
Vanity mirror lamp………………………………………………4-92
Interior overview ……………………………………………………2-5
Key positions …………………………………………………………6-6
Ignition switch position …………………………………………6-6
Starting the engine ………………………………………………..6-8
Keys ……………………………………………………………………..4-4
Key operations ……………………………………………………..4-4
Record your key number ……………………………………….4-4
LCD windows……………………………………………………….4-52
LCD modes (for Type B cluster) …………………………..4-57
Overview …………………………………………………………..4-52
Service mode ……………………………………………………..4-58
Trip information (Trip computer) …………………………4-52
User settings mode (for Type B cluster) ………………..4-58
Light bulbs …………………………………………………………..8-70
Back-up lamp bulb replacement (for 4 door) …………8-92
Back-up lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door) …………8-85
Bulb replacement precaution ………………………………..8-70
Daytime running lamp (Bulb type) bulb
replacement ……………………………………………………..8-81
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type A) …………………………………………..8-77
Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type B) …………………………………………..8-79
Glove box lamp bulb replacement…………………………8-97
K
L
SC USA Index.qxp 7/18/2018 6:05 PM Page 5
Index
6I
Headlamp (Low/High beam) (Bulb type) bulb
replacement (Headlamp Type A) …………………………8-75
Headlamp (Low/High beam) (Bulb type) bulb
replacement (Headlamp Type B) …………………………8-78
Headlamp (Low/High beam) (LED type) bulb
replacement (Headlamp Type B) …………………………8-79
High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement
(for 4 door)……………………………………………………….8-94
High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement
(for 5 door)……………………………………………………….8-88
License plate lamp bulb replacement ……………………8-89
Light bulb position (front) ……………………………………8-72
Light bulb position (rear) (4 door)…………………………8-74
Light bulb position (rear) (5 door)…………………………8-73
Light bulb position (side)……………………………………..8-75
Map lamp bulb replacement ………………………………..8-95
Position lamp + DRL (LED type) bulb replacement..8-80
Rear turn signal lamp bulb replacement (for 4 door) 8-89
Rear turn signal lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door) 8-84
Room lamp bulb replacement ………………………………8-96
Side marker (front) (Bulb type) bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type A) …………………………………………..8-76
Side marker (front) (LED type) bulb replacement
(Headlamp Type B) …………………………………………..8-80
Side marker (rear) (Bulb type) bulb replacement
(Rear combination lamp Type A) (for 5 door) ……..8-87
Side marker (rear) (LED type) bulb replacement
(Rear combination lamp Type B) (for 4 door) ……..8-91
Side marker (rear) (LED type) bulb replacement
(Rear combination lamp Type B) (for 5 door) ……..8-88
Side repeater lamp (bulb type) bulb Replacement ….8-82
Side repeater lamp (LED type) bulb Replacement….8-81
Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement
(for 4 door)……………………………………………………….8-93
Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement
(for 5 door)……………………………………………………….8-85
Stop and tail lamp / Side marker (Bulb type)
replacement (for 4 door) ……………………………………8-90
Stop and tail lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door) ……8-82
Tail lamp (Bulb type) bulb replacement (for 4 door) 8-92
Tail lamp (inside) bulb replacement (for 5 door) ……8-86
Tailgate room lamp bulb replacement (for 5 door) ….8-98
Trunk lamp bulb replacement (for 4 door) …………….8-94
Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement ……………………8-96
Lighting………………………………………………………………..4-77
Battery saver function …………………………………………4-77
Daytime running light …………………………………………4-78
Headlight escort function……………………………………..4-77
Headlight welcome function ………………………………..4-77
High beam operation …………………………………………..4-80
Lighting control ………………………………………………….4-78
Turn signals and lane change signals ……………………4-81
SC USA Index.qxp 7/18/2018 6:05 PM Page 6
I 7
Index
Maintenance services ………………………………………………8-5
Owner maintenance precautions …………………………….8-6
Owners responsibility …………………………………………..8-5
Manual climate control system………………………………..4-94
Air Conditioning refrigerant label ……………………….4-104
Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant ……………………………………….4-103
Climate control air filter ……………………………………4-102
Heating and air conditioning ………………………………..4-95
System operation ………………………………………………4-100
Mirrors ………………………………………………………………..4-43
Inside rearview mirror …………………………………………4-43
Outside rearview mirror……………………………………….4-43
Online factory authorized manuals (U.S. only) …………9-15
Owner maintenance ………………………………………………..8-7
Owner maintenance schedule ………………………………..8-7
Parking brake ……………………………………………………….8-28
Checking the parking brake ………………………………….8-28
Rear view Monitor ………………………………………………..4-76
Rear view monitor ………………………………………………4-76
Recommended lubricants and capacities ……………………9-7
Recommended SAE viscosity number ……………………9-8
Refrigerant label ……………………………………………………9-10
Remote keyless entry ………………………………………………4-5
Battery replacement ………………………………………………4-7
Immobilizer system ………………………………………………4-8
Remote keyless entry system operations ………………….4-5
Transmitter precautions …………………………………………4-6
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. only)……………………….9-15
Road warning …………………………………………………………7-2
Hazard warning flasher …………………………………………7-2
Scheduled maintenance service ………………………………..8-9
Scheduled maintenance service precaution ………………8-9
Seat ……………………………………………………………………….3-2
Drivers seat …………………………………………………………3-2
Front passengers seat …………………………………………..3-2
Front seat adjustment …………………………………………….3-5
Headrest (for front seat)…………………………………………3-6
Rear seat………………………………………………………………3-2
Rear seat adjustment …………………………………………….3-8
Seatback pocket ……………………………………………………3-8
M
P
O S
R
SC USA Index.qxp 7/18/2018 6:05 PM Page 7
Index
8I
Seat belts ………………………………………………………………3-13
Care of seat belts ………………………………………………..3-23
Pre-tensioner seat belt …………………………………………3-19
Seat belt precautions …………………………………………..3-21
Seat belt restraint system ……………………………………..3-13
Special driving conditions ……………………………………..6-49
Driving at night ………………………………………………….6-50
Driving in flooded areas ……………………………………..6-52
Driving in the rain ………………………………………………6-51
Driving off-road ………………………………………………….6-52
Hazardous driving conditions ………………………………6-49
Highway driving ………………………………………………..6-52
Rocking the vehicle …………………………………………….6-49
Smooth cornering………………………………………………..6-50
Sport mode integrated control system ……………………..6-46
Sport mode…………………………………………………………6-46
Steering wheel……………………………………………………….4-40
Electric Power Steering (EPS)………………………………4-40
Heated steering wheel …………………………………………4-42
Horn ………………………………………………………………….4-41
Tilt and telescopic steering ………………………………….4-41
Storage compartment …………………………………………..4-119
Center console storage ……………………………………….4-119
Glove box…………………………………………………………4-119
Luggage net holder …………………………………………..4-120
Sunglass holder ………………………………………………..4-120
Sunroof ………………………………………………………………..4-34
Resetting the sunroof …………………………………………..4-38
Sliding the sunroof………………………………………………4-36
Sunroof open warning …………………………………………4-35
Sunshade …………………………………………………………..4-38
Tilting the sunroof ………………………………………………4-37
Tailgate (for 5 door) ………………………………………………4-19
Closing the tailgate …………………………………………….4-19
Emergency tailgate safety release …………………………4-20
Opening the tailgate …………………………………………….4-19
Theft-alarm system ………………………………………………..4-10
Armed stage ……………………………………………………….4-10
Disarmed stage……………………………………………………4-11
Theft-alarm stage ………………………………………………..4-11
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS — Type A) ……7-7
Changing a tire with TPMS ………………………………….7-10
Low tire pressure telltale ……………………………………….7-8
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) malfunction
indicator …………………………………………………………….7-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS — Type B) ….7-12
Changing a tire with TPMS ………………………………….7-16
Check tire pressure………………………………………………7-12
Low tire pressure position telltale …………………………7-14
Low tire pressure telltale ……………………………………..7-14
Tire specification and pressure label ……………………….9-10
T
SC USA Index.qxp 7/18/2018 6:05 PM Page 8
I 9
Index
Tires and wheels ……………………………………………………..9-5
Tires and wheels ……………………………………………………8-40
All season tires ………………………………………………….8-52
Checking tire inflation pressure…………………………….8-41
Low aspect ratio tire …………………………………………..8-54
Radial-ply tires……………………………………………………8-53
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures…………….8-40
Snow tires …………………………………………………………8-52
Summer tires ……………………………………………………..8-52
Tire care …………………………………………………………….8-40
Tire chains …………………………………………………………8-53
Tire maintenance ………………………………………………..8-45
Tire pressure……………………………………………………….8-41
Tire replacement ………………………………………………..8-44
Tire rotation ……………………………………………………….8-42
Tire sidewall labeling…………………………………………..8-45
Tire traction ……………………………………………………….8-45
Wheel alignment and tire balance …………………………8-43
Wheel replacement …………………………………………….8-45
Towing ………………………………………………………………..7-28
Emergency towing ………………………………………………7-29
Removable towing hook (front)…………………………….7-29
Towing service ……………………………………………………7-28
Trunk (for 4 door)………………………………………………….4-17
Closing the trunk ………………………………………………..4-17
Emergency trunk safety release …………………………….4-18
Opening the trunk ………………………………………………4-17
Vehicle break-in process …………………………………………..1-5
Vehicle certification label …………………………………………9-9
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders …………1-6
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)…………………………9-9
Vehicle load limit ………………………………………………….6-59
Certification label ………………………………………………6-62
Tire and loading information label ……………………….6-59
Vehicle weight ……………………………………………………..6-64
Base curb weight ………………………………………………..6-64
Cargo weight ……………………………………………………..6-64
GAW (Gross axle weight) ……………………………………6-64
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) ……………………….6-64
GVW (Gross vehicle weight) ………………………………6-64
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) ……………………6-64
Vehicle curb weight …………………………………………….6-64
Warning and indicator lights……………………………………4-65
Indicator lights ……………………………………………………4-73
Warning lights ……………………………………………………4-65
Washer fluid …………………………………………………………8-27
Checking the washer fluid level …………………………..8-27
Weight/volume ……………………………………………………….9-6
V
W
SC USA Index.qxp 7/18/2018 6:05 PM Page 9
Index
10I
Windows ………………………………………………………………4-22
Manual windows ………………………………………………..4-27
Power windows ………………………………………………….4-23
Windshield defrosting and defogging……………………..4-114
Automatic climate control system ……………………….4-115
Defogging logic ………………………………………………..4-116
Manual climate control system …………………………..4-114
Winter driving……………………………………………………….6-54
Carry emergency equipment ………………………………..6-58
Change to winter weight oil if necessary…………….6-57
Check battery and cables ……………………………………..6-55
Check spark plugs and ignition system ………………….6-57
Don’t let ice and snow accumulate underneath ……….6-57
Don’t let your parking brake freeze ……………………….6-57
Snowy or Icy conditions ……………………………………..6-54
To keep locks from freezing ………………………………..6-57
Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system 6-57
Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant ………………6-55
Wiper blades …………………………………………………………8-33
Blade inspection………………………………………………….8-33
Blade replacement ………………………………………………8-33
Wipers and washers ………………………………………………4-83
Rear window wiper and washer switch (for 5 door) ..4-87
Windshield washers (front) ………………………………….4-85
Windshield wipers ……………………..
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the Rio Kia works, you can view and download the Kia Rio 2019 Hatchback Owner’s Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Owner’s Manual for Kia Rio as well as other Kia manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Owner’s Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Kia Rio. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Kia Rio 2019 Hatchback Owner’s Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Kia Rio 2019 Hatchback Owner’s Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Kia Rio 2019 Hatchback Owner’s Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Kia Rio 2019 Hatchback Owner’s Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Kia Rio 2019 Hatchback Owner’s Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.